dms600 operation manual 756667 ena

220
MicroSCADA Pro DMS 600 4.3 Operation Manual

Upload: mukesh-kumar

Post on 21-Apr-2015

63 views

Category:

Documents


1 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

MicroSCADA Pro DMS 600 4.3Operation Manual

Page 2: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena
Page 3: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Contents:

1. About this manual ................................................................................ 11

1.1. Copyrights .................................................................................... 111.2. Trademarks .................................................................................. 111.3. General ........................................................................................ 111.4. Use of symbols ............................................................................ 121.5. Document conventions ................................................................ 121.6. Terminology .................................................................................. 131.7. Abbreviations ............................................................................... 151.8. Related documents ...................................................................... 151.9. Document revisions ..................................................................... 16

2. Introduction ........................................................................................... 17

2.1. General about DMS 600 software ............................................... 172.2. General about DMS 600 Workstation .......................................... 17

3. Software release updates .................................................................... 19

3.1. New features and functions in DMS 600 4.3 ............................... 193.2. New features and functions in DMS 600 4.2 ............................... 213.3. New features and functions in DMS 600 4.1 ............................... 24

4. User and region management ............................................................. 26

4.1. General about user and region management .............................. 264.2. Logoff mode ................................................................................. 264.3. User level rights ........................................................................... 264.4. Regions ........................................................................................ 27

5. Starting DMS 600 WS ........................................................................... 28

5.1. Starting DMS 600 WS .................................................................. 28

6. User interface ........................................................................................ 30

6.1. General about user interface ....................................................... 306.2. Workstation status bar ................................................................. 306.3. User interface settings ................................................................. 316.4. Network windows ......................................................................... 31

6.4.1. General about network windows ................................... 316.4.2. Controlling the views in network windows ..................... 326.4.3. Operational zooming ..................................................... 33

6.4.3.1. System specific zooms ............................... 336.4.3.2. Session specific zooms .............................. 33

6.4.4. Coloring of network windows ........................................ 346.4.5. Displaying conductor codes and line types ................... 356.4.6. Hiding voltage levels ..................................................... 35

3

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation ManualIssued: 9.10.2009Version: A/9.10.2009

Page 4: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

6.4.7. Coloring in network and protection analysis ................. 356.4.8. Code and label controls ................................................ 366.4.9. Showing free database objects, texts and

measurements .............................................................. 366.4.10. Symbol legend .............................................................. 376.4.11. Line color legend ........................................................... 37

6.5. Parallel network views ................................................................. 376.6. Network diagrams ........................................................................ 37

6.6.1. General about network diagrams .................................. 376.6.2. Coloring in network diagrams ....................................... 386.6.3. Codes and labels in network diagrams ......................... 38

6.7. Station diagrams .......................................................................... 396.7.1. General about station diagrams .................................... 396.7.2. Station and control pictures .......................................... 396.7.3. MicroSCADA control dialogs ......................................... 396.7.4. Internal station diagrams ............................................... 396.7.5. Coloring in station diagrams ......................................... 40

6.8. Other fixed medium and low voltage diagrams ............................ 406.8.1. General about other fixed medium and low voltage

diagrams ....................................................................... 406.9. Online help ................................................................................... 41

7. Settings of workstations ...................................................................... 42

7.1. General about settings ................................................................. 427.2. User manager settings ................................................................. 42

7.2.1. Controlling user rights ................................................... 427.2.2. Changing user identifiers or user rights ........................ 427.2.3. Changing password ...................................................... 43

7.3. Network view settings .................................................................. 437.3.1. General about network view settings ............................ 437.3.2. User interface language settings .................................. 437.3.3. User interface fonts settings ......................................... 447.3.4. Local network view settings .......................................... 44

7.4. Automatic functions associated with state changes .................... 457.4.1. Defining automatic function settings ............................. 457.4.2. Automatic GSM message settings in fault cases .......... 477.4.3. Automatic telephone answering machine using in fault

cases ............................................................................. 477.5. Color settings ............................................................................... 48

7.5.1. General about color settings ......................................... 487.5.2. MV/LV station, switch and customer code color

settings .......................................................................... 487.5.3. Settings of coloring limits for network and protection

analysis ......................................................................... 487.5.4. Brightness and contrast for color bitmaps ..................... 49

7.6. Network and protection analysis settings .................................... 49

4

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 5: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

7.6.1. General about network and protection analysissettings .......................................................................... 49

7.6.2. General network analysis settings ................................ 497.6.3. Load calculation settings ............................................... 507.6.4. Protection analysis settings .......................................... 527.6.5. Meshed network and protection analysis settings ........ 54

7.7. Fault management settings .......................................................... 547.8. Fault location settings .................................................................. 56

7.8.1. General about fault location settings ............................. 567.8.2. General fault location settings ....................................... 56

7.8.2.1. Defining fault location settings .................... 567.8.2.2. Certainty factor settings .............................. 577.8.2.3. Faulted zone location settings .................... 577.8.2.4. Load current compensation settings .......... 587.8.2.5. Impedance-based fault location settings .... 597.8.2.6. Distance-based fault location settings ........ 597.8.2.7. Impedance-based earth fault location

settings ....................................................... 607.8.3. Switching planning settings ........................................... 607.8.4. Reporting settings ......................................................... 617.8.5. Setting up switching state document ............................ 62

7.9. Background map settings ............................................................ 637.9.1. General about background map settings ...................... 637.9.2. Outlook of background maps ........................................ 637.9.3. Storage location of background maps .......................... 64

8. General functions ................................................................................. 66

8.1. Selecting region ........................................................................... 668.2. Selecting operational modes ........................................................ 668.3. Controlling voltage levels ............................................................. 688.4. Updating network data and normal switching state ..................... 69

8.4.1. Updating network data .................................................. 698.4.2. Updating normal switching state ................................... 70

8.5. Locating network components ..................................................... 708.6. Showing node information ........................................................... 718.7. Showing network component data ............................................... 71

8.7.1. Free data forms ............................................................. 718.7.2. Opening free data forms ............................................... 728.7.3. Browsing free data forms .............................................. 728.7.4. Content of free data forms ............................................ 73

8.8. Management of MV/LV substation texts ...................................... 738.9. Browsing the attached documents ............................................... 748.10. Browsing the archives .................................................................. 748.11. Displaying MV feeder information ................................................ 758.12. Showing important MV/LV stations transformers ........................ 758.13. Alarms, warnings, notices and events ......................................... 76

8.13.1. General about alarms, warnings, notices and events .... 76

5

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 6: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

8.13.2. MicroSCADA alarms ..................................................... 768.13.3. Showing alarms and warnings in network windows ...... 778.13.4. Showing notices in notices list ...................................... 78

8.13.4.1. Contents of the notices list ......................... 788.13.5. Working with events lists ............................................... 79

8.13.5.1. Showing events in events list ..................... 798.13.5.2. Contents of the event list ............................ 80

8.14. Simulation of historical events ..................................................... 818.14.1. General about historical events .................................... 818.14.2. Simulating historical events .......................................... 82

8.15. Opening MicroSCADA pictures .................................................... 828.16. Finding customer information ....................................................... 838.17. Sending GSM messages ............................................................. 83

8.17.1. Sending maintenance outage information using GSMmessage ........................................................................ 83

8.17.2. Sending free form GSM message ................................. 848.17.3. Browsing the sent GSM messages ............................... 858.17.4. Sending new GSM message to same customer

group ............................................................................. 858.18. Defining telephone answering machine ....................................... 86

8.18.1. General about telephone answering machine .............. 868.18.2. Defining of telephone answering machine

functioning ..................................................................... 868.18.3. Creating new telephone answering machine

message ........................................................................ 878.18.4. Editing telephone answering machine message ........... 878.18.5. Removing telephone answering machine message ..... 88

8.19. Creating switching state document .............................................. 888.19.1. Creating switching state document ............................... 888.19.2. Inserting the value for additional load and border

switch ............................................................................ 898.20. Field crew management ............................................................... 90

8.20.1. Overview of field crew management ............................. 908.20.2. Adding, deleting, and modifying field crew data ............ 918.20.3. Modifying field crew data .............................................. 928.20.4. Showing field crews ...................................................... 93

8.21. Adding own features to menu ...................................................... 938.22. Notes and findings ....................................................................... 94

8.22.1. General about notes and findings ................................. 948.22.2. Notes management ....................................................... 948.22.3. Findings management .................................................. 95

8.23. Map printing ................................................................................. 958.23.1. Map printing procedure ................................................. 958.23.2. Map printing parameters ............................................... 96

8.24. Managing switching plans ............................................................ 978.25. Trouble call management ............................................................ 99

8.25.1. About Trouble Call Management .................................. 998.25.2. Managing customer calls in DMS 600 Workstation ...... 99

6

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 7: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

8.25.3. Using Disturbance Data Form ..................................... 101

9. Topology management ....................................................................... 104

9.1. Basic functions in topology management .................................. 1049.1.1. General about topology management ......................... 1049.1.2. Switch state quality (status) received from SCADA .... 1049.1.3. Monitoring network topology ....................................... 1059.1.4. Showing downstream and upstream traces ................ 106

9.1.4.1. Traces in network window ........................ 1069.1.4.2. Traces in network diagrams ..................... 1069.1.4.3. Switching devices along trace .................. 1069.1.4.4. Traces from Monitor Pro graphics ............ 106

9.1.5. Showing abnormal switching states ............................ 1079.1.6. Showing LV switch changes ....................................... 1079.1.7. Finding unsupplied MV/LV stations and customers .... 108

9.2. Changing switching states ......................................................... 1089.2.1. General about switching states ................................... 1089.2.2. Changing switching state of switches connected to

MicroSCADA ............................................................... 1089.2.3. Manual state update for switches connected to

MicroSCADA ............................................................... 1099.2.4. Changing switching state of switches not connected to

MicroSCADA ............................................................... 1099.2.5. Changing switching state of line sections ................... 1109.2.6. Changing LV switch states .......................................... 111

9.3. Checking switching actions ........................................................ 111

10. AMR user interface integration ......................................................... 113

10.1. AMR menu items ....................................................................... 11310.2. Drawing symbols and their locations ......................................... 11410.3. AMR fault handling ..................................................................... 114

10.3.1. About AMR fault handling dialog ................................. 11410.3.2. Active alarms tab ........................................................ 11410.3.3. Events tab ................................................................... 115

10.4. Creating LV outage reports using AMR events .......................... 11610.5. Meter finder dialog ..................................................................... 11610.6. Meter settings ............................................................................ 11710.7. Measurements ........................................................................... 11910.8. AMR predefined settings files .................................................... 120

11. Network and protection analysis ...................................................... 122

11.1. General about network and protection analysis ......................... 12211.2. Network analysis ........................................................................ 123

11.2.1. Load modeling ............................................................ 12311.2.2. Load forecasting and load estimation ......................... 124

7

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 8: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

11.2.3. Showing load curve for MV/LV stations and linesections ....................................................................... 124

11.2.4. Using of MicroSCADA measurement data in networkanalysis ....................................................................... 125

11.2.5. Using starting motors in network analysis ................... 12611.2.6. Performing network analysis ....................................... 12711.2.7. Showing network analysis result ................................. 12811.2.8. Feeder power and loss reports ................................... 129

11.3. Protection analysis ..................................................................... 13111.3.1. Using of relay settings in protection analysis .............. 13111.3.2. Showing protection relay settings data ....................... 13211.3.3. Notices of protection analysis ..................................... 13211.3.4. Performing protection analysis .................................... 13311.3.5. Showing protection analysis results of given fault

location ........................................................................ 13411.3.6. Showing earth-fault protection analysis results ........... 135

11.4. Network and protection analysis using forecasted loads ........... 13611.5. Network and protection analysis using simulated data .............. 137

11.5.1. General about simulation ............................................ 13711.5.2. Changing switching state ............................................ 13811.5.3. Changing network analysis settings ............................ 13811.5.4. Changing protection analysis settings ........................ 13911.5.5. Changing relay settings .............................................. 13911.5.6. Changing voltage value in feeding substations ........... 14011.5.7. Changing power values to motors .............................. 14111.5.8. Changing power values to generators ........................ 14111.5.9. Setting date and time for network analysis ................. 142

12. Fault management .............................................................................. 143

12.1. General about fault management .............................................. 14312.2. General progress of the MV fault management ......................... 14312.3. Changing to automatic fault isolation and restoration mode ...... 14412.4. Managing fault handling areas ................................................... 14412.5. Fault location .............................................................................. 145

12.5.1. General about fault location ........................................ 14512.5.2. Fault distance calculation ............................................ 14612.5.3. Management of on-site readable fault detector state ... 14712.5.4. Progress of the fault location ...................................... 147

12.6. Fault isolation and restoration .................................................... 14812.6.1. General about fault isolation ....................................... 14812.6.2. Automatic fault isolation and restoration ..................... 149

12.6.2.1. General about automatic fault isolation andrestoration ................................................ 149

12.6.2.2. Performing automatic fault isolation andrestoration ................................................ 149

12.6.3. General about manual fault isolation and restoration .. 15112.7. Manual MV fault management ................................................... 152

8

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 9: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

12.7.1. Selection of active fault ............................................... 15212.7.2. Information about the active fault and fault location

parameters .................................................................. 15312.7.3. Fault information ......................................................... 154

12.7.3.1. Base data of fault ..................................... 15412.7.3.2. Fault current data ..................................... 15612.7.3.3. Fault impedance data ............................... 15712.7.3.4. Distance data ........................................... 15812.7.3.5. Fault detector data ................................... 15912.7.3.6. Primary transformer data .......................... 15912.7.3.7. Feeding network data ............................... 160

12.7.4. Information about possible fault locations for activefault ............................................................................. 161

12.7.5. Defining the faulted zone manually ............................. 16212.7.6. Performing manual fault isolation and restoration ....... 16312.7.7. Setting the fault repaired ............................................. 164

12.8. Fault location simulation ............................................................ 16412.8.1. General about fault location simulation ....................... 16412.8.2. Creating a new fault for areas fed by a disconnector or

MV fuse ....................................................................... 16412.8.3. Locating real fault with changed data ......................... 16512.8.4. Changing fault information .......................................... 16512.8.5. Changing fault location parameters ............................ 16612.8.6. Locating real faults in MicroSCADA disconnection ..... 16612.8.7. Demonstrating fault location ....................................... 167

12.9. Manual sending of GSM message in fault case ........................ 16712.10. Manual definition of telephone answering machine message in

fault case .................................................................................... 16812.11. Management of LV outage ......................................................... 168

13. Switching planning ............................................................................. 170

13.1. General about switching planning .............................................. 17013.2. Creating switching sequence ..................................................... 171

13.2.1. Automatic switching sequence creation ...................... 17113.2.2. Manual switching sequence creation .......................... 172

13.3. Modifying switching sequence ................................................... 17313.4. Saving and copying existing switching sequence ...................... 17313.5. Converting an existing switching sequence to a Contingency

Analysis sequence ..................................................................... 17413.6. Simulating switching sequence .................................................. 17413.7. Simulating Contingency Analysis sequence .............................. 17513.8. Executing switching sequence ................................................... 17513.9. Word documents ........................................................................ 176

13.9.1. Managing Word documents ........................................ 17613.9.2. Document settings ...................................................... 17713.9.3. Document templates ................................................... 177

13.10. Modifying data content of switching plans ................................. 178

9

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 10: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

13.10.1. Plan data ..................................................................... 17813.10.2. Switching data ............................................................. 181

13.11. Contingency Analysis Data ........................................................ 18213.12. Modifying switching operations .................................................. 18313.13. Reconfiguration planning ........................................................... 184

13.13.1. General about reconfiguration .................................... 18413.13.2. Performing reconfiguration planning ........................... 18513.13.3. Reconfiguration planning results ................................. 185

14. Outage data management .................................................................. 187

14.1. General about outage data management .................................. 18714.2. General about outage data ........................................................ 18714.3. Viewing outage information ........................................................ 18714.4. Reporting fault and maintenance outages ................................. 188

14.4.1. General about reporting fault and maintenanceoutages ....................................................................... 188

14.4.2. Reporting of LV network outages ................................ 18914.4.3. Reporting of MV network outages ............................... 19014.4.4. Manual creation of MV outage report .......................... 19014.4.5. Reporting reclosings ................................................... 19114.4.6. Automatically filled-in data in reports .......................... 19114.4.7. Defining exact MV fault location for reporting ............. 19214.4.8. Inserting additional data of an outage ......................... 19314.4.9. Outage areas .............................................................. 195

14.4.9.1. Viewing outage area data ......................... 19514.4.9.2. Manual updating of switchings ................. 19614.4.9.3. Manual updating of outage areas ............. 197

14.5. Printing outage report ................................................................ 19814.6. Archiving outage data ................................................................ 19814.7. Customer and MV/LV substation outage data ........................... 19914.8. Exporting outage data ................................................................ 200

15. Database analysis .............................................................................. 202

15.1. General about database analysis .............................................. 20215.2. Queries in DMS 600 software .................................................... 202

15.2.1. Query results in DMS 600 software ............................ 20215.2.2. Performing ready graphical query ............................... 20315.2.3. Graphical restriction of the query focus ...................... 20315.2.4. Creating simple graphical query in DMS 600

software ....................................................................... 20415.3. Reporting ................................................................................... 20515.4. Adding query command to menu ............................................... 205

Appendix 1 ................................................................................................. 206

Quick guide ........................................................................................... 206

Index ............................................................................................................ 209

10

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 11: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

About this manual1.

Copyrights1.1.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not beconstrued as a commitment by ABB Oy. ABB Oy assumes no responsibility for anyerrors that may appear in this document.

In no event shall ABB Oy be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequentialdamages of any nature or kind arising from the use of this document, nor shall ABB Oybe liable for incidental or consequential damages arising from the use of any softwareor hardware described in this document.

This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written per-mission from ABB Oy, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third partynor used for any unauthorized purpose.

The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license andmay be used, copied, or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.

Copyright © 2009 ABB Oy.

All rights reserved.

Document number: 1MRS756667

Release: A/2009

Trademarks1.2.

Registration and trademarks used in this document include:

Microsoft® and Windows®: Registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Windows Server 2003™: Trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Other brands or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respectiveholders.

General1.3.

This Operation Manual describes all the functions needed in everyday use of Micro-SCADA Pro Distribution Management System DMS 600 Workstation (later in thismanual DMS 600 WS) software. The DMS 600 4.3 is a direct successor to DMS 6004.1/4.2 and Open++ Opera 3.3.

11

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 12: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

This Operation Manual describes the properties of all DMS 600 WS functions by sup-posing that all licenses and optional functions are included and there are no user levelrestrictions. The absence of a license, the absence of an optional function or user levelrestrictions remove optional functions or make them unavailable in the user interface.

This document complies with the program version 4.3.

Additional information, such as Release Notes, can be found on the program distributionmedia.

Use of symbols1.4.

This publication includes warning, caution and information symbols where appropriateto point out safety-related or other important information. It also includes tips to pointout useful hints to the reader. The corresponding symbols should be interpreted as follows:

Warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which couldresult in personal injury.

Caution icon indicates important information or a warningrelated to the concept discussed in the text. It might indicatethe presence of a hazard, which could result in corruption ofsoftware or damage to equipment/property.

Information icon alerts the reader to relevant factors andconditions.

Tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design yourproject or how to use a certain function.

Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, and caution hazards are associ-ated with equipment or property damage, it should be understood that operation ofdamaged equipment could, under certain operational conditions, result in degraded processperformance leading to personal injury or death. Therefore, comply fully with all warningsand caution notices.

Document conventions1.5.

The following conventions are used for the presentation of material:• The names of menus and menu items are boldfaced. For example, the File menu.

12

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 13: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

• The following convention is used for menu operations: MenuName > MenuItem> CascadedMenuItem. For example: select File > Coloring > Topology byFeeders.

• The Start menu name always refers to the Start menu on the Windows® Task Bar.• System prompts/messages and user responses/input are shown in the Courier font.

For example, if you enter a value out of range, the following message is displayed:Entered value is not valid. The value must be 0 to 30.

• The names of push and toggle buttons are boldfaced. For example, click OK.• The words in names of screen elements (for example, the title in the title bar of a

window, the label for a field of a dialog box) are initially capitalized.• Capital letters are used for the name of a keyboard key if it is labeled on the keyboard.

For example, press the ENTER key.• Lowercase letters are used for the name of a keyboard key that is not labeled on the

keyboard. For example, the space bar, comma key, and so on.• Press CTRL+C indicates that you must hold down the CTRL key while pressing

the C key (to copy a selected object in this case).• Press ESC E C indicates that you must press and release each key in sequence.• The names of the directories and files (for example, DMS600/Settings.exe) are ini-

tially capitalized and shown in the italic font.• The names of MS Access tables, queries and fields are capitalized (for example

CODE field in INFOCODE table).

Terminology1.6.

The following is a list of terms associated with the DMS 600 which you should befamiliar with. The list contains terms that are unique to ABB or have a usage or definitionthat is different from the standard industry usage.

DescriptionTerm

Certainty factors are used during inferencing. They define thestress on individual inference rules.

Certainty factor

Database for dynamic data in DMS 600.DMS 600 database

A program primarily used to model the distribution network ontothe network database.

DMS 600 Network Editor; DMS600 NE

An application used for data exchange between MicroSCADAand the instances of DMS 600.

DMS 600 Server Application;DMS 600 SA

A program designed for the operating personnel of electriccompanies. It is used to monitor and operate electricity networks.

DMS 600 Workstation; DMS600 WS

A vector map which is drawn after other map materials and isthe top map on the screen.

Draw upon map

The fault distance is determined by comparing the measuredshort-circuit current and the type of fault with the calculatedshort-circuit currents along the feeder in which a fault has beenoccurred. The fault location of DMS 600 WS is based on faultdistance calculation and fault detector data.

Fault distance

13

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 14: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

DescriptionTerm

Fault snapshot file created by DMS 600 SA. File names of faultsnapshot files are Fau<xxx>.txt in which <xxx> is a consecutivenumber.

Fault file

Free data forms are the general way to present DMS 600 data-base content.

Free data form

Free database objects are user-defined object types which canbe added to the network database.

Free database object

In the load current compensation the load current just beforethe fault is subtracted from the measured fault current. In themore accurate model the load behavior caused by the voltagedrop during the fault is taken into account.

Load current compensation

A group of computers and other devices dispersed over a relat-ively limited area and connected by a communications link thatenables any device to interact with any other device on the net-work. See also Wide Area Network.

Local Area Network; LAN

Enables interaction with the operator and the base systemcomputer. The monitor may be of Visual SCIL or X-monitor type.MicroSCADA monitors are always connected to SYS 500 orSYS 600. MicroSCADA Monitor Pro is a new application thatcan show the Monitor Pro graphics of SYS 600.

MicroSCADA monitor

MicroSCADA Monitor Pro

The MicroSCADA OPC Data Access Server is an implementationof OPC Data Access Custom Interface Standard, Version 2.05A,which is the interface specification in the MicroSCADA system.

MicroSCADA OPC Server

A type of MicroSCADA application picture, which gives anoverview of the processes in a station. The station picture isoften designed according to a single line diagram.

MicroSCADA station picture

Database for network data.Network database

A MicroSCADA process object which has a connection to a realprocess.

Process object

Map information consisting of dots. The number of dots dependson the resolution of the map. Each dot has some color informa-tion according to the number of colors used. See also Vectormap.

Raster map

Process object identification in DMS 600Scada code

The settings which define the functions of all instances of DMS600 NE and DMS 600 WS.

System specific settings

The file containing temporary network data (tempnet.dat).Temporary network file

Map information which consists of lines and curves. See alsoRaster map.

Vector map

A MicroSCADA process point which does not have a connectionto a real process.

Virtual process point

A communications network that connects geographically separ-ated areas. See also Local Area Network.

Wide Area Network; WAN

14

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 15: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

DescriptionTerm

The settings which define the functions of a local workstation(DMS 600 NE or DMS 600 WS).

Workstation specific settings

Abbreviations1.7.

DescriptionAbbreviation

Distribution Management SystemDMS

MicroSCADA Pro Distribution Management System DMS 600DMS 600

Geographic Information SystemGIS

Global Positioning SystemGPS

Global System for Mobile CommunicationGSM

High voltageHV

Intelligent Electronic DeviceIED

Local Area NetworkLAN

Low voltageLV

MicroSCADA SYS 500 version 8.4.2, 8.4.3, 8.4.4, or 8.4.5, orMicroSCADA Pro Control System SYS 600 version 9.x

MicroSCADA

Medium voltageMV

Supervisory Control And Data AcquisitionSCADA

Short Message Service. Service for sending messages to mobilephones that use Global System for Mobile (GSM) communica-tion.

SMS

MicroSCADA Pro Control System SYS 600 version 9.xSYS 600

Wide Area NetworkWAN

Related documents1.8.

Table 1.8-1 MicroSCADA Pro DMS 600 related documentsMRS numberName of the manual

1MRS756665MicroSCADA Pro DMS 600 4.3

System Overview

1MRS756666MicroSCADA Pro DMS 600 4.3

Integration with SYS 600

15

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 16: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

MRS numberName of the manual

1MRS756668MicroSCADA Pro DMS 600 4.3

Installation Manual

1MRS756669MicroSCADA Pro DMS 600 4.3

System Administration

1MRS756634MicroSCADA Pro SYS 600 9.3

Installation and Administration Manual

1MRS756635MicroSCADA Pro SYS 600 9.3

Operation Manual

Document revisions1.9.

HistoryDateRevision numberVersion

New document9.10.20094.3A

16

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 17: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Introduction2.

General about DMS 600 software2.1.

MicroSCADA Pro Distribution Management System DMS 600 4.3 (DMS 600) is a newversion of Open++ Opera software version 3.3 with extended functionality. DMS 600functionality is very deeply integrated to MicroSCADA Pro Control System SYS 600version 9.x (SYS 600). Most of the functionality can be used also with MicroSCADASYS 500 version 8.4.2, 8.4.3, 8.4.4 or 8.4.5.

The abbreviation SYS 600 is used only when the topic is validonly for SYS 600. Abbreviation MicroSCADA is used whenthe topic is valid for both SYS 500 and SYS 600.

DMS 600 is a geographical distribution network management system (DMS). The soft-ware extends traditional SCADA capabilities by providing geographically based networkviews. DMS 600 (Base) package provides network component data management andnetwork modeling to provide network overview and topological coloring to see the net-work's state. In addition, DMS 600 has many optional modules with advanced functions.DMS 600 can be used with MicroSCADA, without SCADA or with other SCADA sys-tems using OPC Data Access interface. The software has been designed to assist theoperation's personnel of electric companies in monitoring and operating their networks.

Both raster and vector based maps can be used as backgrounds for the network window.It is also possible to create and use schematic network views, instead of geographicallybased network presentations and maps.

The software runs on PCs using MS Windows operating systems. Only 32 bit versionsof operating systems are officially tested and supported.

Additional (regional) servers can be used to store network data to keep the start up timereasonable in low speed LAN/WAN networks. MS SQL Server, Oracle or MS Accesscan be used as database for DMS 600. Also other database servers can be used if theysupport the required features of a DMS 600 database.

The graphics-based user interface of DMS 600 is unambiguous and the standard Windows‘look and feel’, together with the online help, makes it easy to learn.

General about DMS 600 Workstation2.2.

The DMS 600 system consists of three programs for users: DMS 600 Network Editor(DMS 600 NE), DMS 600 Server Application (DMS 600 SA) and DMS 600 Workstation(DMS 600 WS). The architecture of the DMS 600 system is described in more detail inSystem Administration. DMS 600 Workstation (DMS 600 WS) is a program for the

17

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 18: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

operative personnel of electric companies to monitor and operate their medium and lowvoltage distribution networks.

The program contains the following functions:• Alarming• Network topology management• Network analysis including power flow and fault current calculations together with

protection analysis• Operational simulations• Fault location based on fault distance calculation and fault detector data• Restoration• Switching planning• Outage data management• Field crew management• Load estimation• Customer service• Database analysis• Document archive and• Map printing

The functional content of the system depends on the licenses, sublicenses and definitionof optional functions (for more information about installing DMS 600, see InstallationManual and System Administration).

The basis of DMS 600 WS is a distribution network database managed by DMS 600 NEand real time process data from MicroSCADA. You can control actions using Micro-SCADA graphics, or you can open SYS 600 control dialogs directly from DMS 600WS. You have control rights to an opened control dialog only if your username andpassword in the DMS 600 match with the user information in SYS 600 and if you areauthorized to control the selected switch.

Open++ Integra is an information management system for ageographical distribution network. It can be used to replaceDMS 600 NE in a DMS 600 distribution management system.

18

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 19: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Software release updates3.

New features and functions in DMS 600 4.33.1.

Inverse time curves

An inverse curve (or inverse time curve) is a curve that is used to define an operationtime of a protection relay. The input is typically a relation between set current value(Iset) and measured fault current (I) => ( I / Iset ). Inverse time curves are defined withvarious equations. Some of them are defined in international standards (IEC/IEEE) andsome are industrial de facto standards (IAC) or manufacturer-specific curves (RI, RD).

Extended Trouble Call Management

Trouble Call Management is used to handle customer complaints and fault notifications.Trouble Call Management uses the Disturbance Data Form to collect information aboutthe faults, such as the nature and location of the fault. The Trouble Call Managementsublicense is required to enable this feature.

AMR extensions

MicroSCADA Pro DMS 600 can be integrated into AMM/AMR (Automatic MeterManagement / Automatic Meter Reading) systems. This enables using the communicationand device infrastructure created mainly for energy metering to also remotely monitorthe low voltage networks. The monitoring can include receiving spontaneous alarmsregarding network faults and voltage violations, as well as reading measurement valueswhen exact data is needed.

DMS 600 combines information from several customer points and can inference, forexample, a probably blown fuse in the LV network. DMS 600 uses OPC DA client toconnect to AMR system and, thus can receive events close to real-time.

Improved fault management

The fault management includes the following improvements:

• Fault handling areas can be used to allow automatic fault location only in selectedareas. The areas can be defined separately for each switching device.

• Possibility to set the fault status.• Fault repairing time estimate can be set directly from the fault list without the tele-

phone answering machine functionality.• General information window shows duration of the fault, number of unsupplied

customers per fault even without fault location or opening the switching plan.

19

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 20: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

• The fault distance in meters is available from some protection devices. The distancecan be used instead or parallel to reactance and fault current in the fault location.

• Possibility to change the intervals for reading outage data and for unsupplied MVLVsubstation data.

• Possibility to create a fault for areas fed by a disconnector or a MV fuse.

OPC interface extension

The OPC interface extension includes the following new functionalities:

• The system administrator is able to configure the OPC item name suffixes.• The DMS 600 SA subscribes the TRIGGER OPC items for each circuit breaker in

order to initialize the fault creation functionality.• All available OPC items constituting faults are subscribed. This function is performed

right after the TRIGGER OPC item has been activated. For the OPC items to beavailable, the OPC item name must be configured, and the process object must becreated in SYS 600.

• Possibility to create a new fault for further processing.• The subscribed OPC items are reset so that they can be reused in the next fault case.• A notification of changed OPC configuration. DMS 600 SA reflects the changes in

the OPC configuration without the need to restart it.• Integrating manual switches to SYS 600 offers a practical way to display also

switching operations of manually operated switches in the SYS 600 event list.

Improved switching planning

The following improvements have been made for switching planning:

• Fully supported MV fuses. The MV fuses can be handled in the same way asmanually controlled disconnectors.

• The breaking capacity of a switch is checked against the calculated load currentwhen opening a switch.

• Fully supported CBs with trucks.• Locking switches open from the control dialog is supported.

Transformer model changes

The Transformer model is renewed to better meet the needs of three winding transformers.The data forms of the MV/LV transformer and primary transformer are renewed. Also,the transformer series functionality has been made easier to use.

20

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 21: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Network planning

With the network planning feature of DMS 600 NE the user can design the networkbefore adding it to the network database. It enables comparing the alternative networkstructures, monitoring investment and interruption costs, as well as making calculationsbased on suggested network components.

DXF import for network data

DXF import for network data, initially exported from 3rd party GIS system, is nowpresent in the DMS 600 Network Editor's basic functionality.

The user is able to define the DXF layers, line routes and symbol blocks to be importedinto the DMS 600 database. All the desired MV/LV the line sections and nodes areimported directly into DMS 600 network model.

In addition to DXF format, also the AutoCAD's DWG format is able to use in DXFimport function. The new DMS 600 DXF Import Tool, launched from NE, uses OpenDesign Alliance's (ODA) DWGdirect™ library in reading DXF and DWG formats.

New features and functions in DMS 600 4.23.2.

Extended automatic fault isolation and restoration

In addition to control actions, the generated sequence file includes the circuit breakersto be checked. The information can be used to check that the circuit breaker feeding theback-up connection remains closed. If that circuit breaker is opened due to relay trip,the restoration will be cancelled.

Switch state updates with modified time and possibility to correcttimes in event list

The switch control dialog for manual devices includes a control that gives the real timewhen the switch was operated. In addition, the event time can be changed in the DMS600 event list afterwards. This enables, for example, the creation of outage reports withcorrected event times.

Relational database servers

DMS 600 can use relational database servers (such as MS SQL Server and Oracle) insteadof MS Access database to store data. The connection to a database is made using ODBCdata source name (DSN) definitions. MS Access databases without DSN definitions are

21

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 22: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

still supported. For Hot Stand By systems, two relational database servers with a replic-ation feature are recommended instead of Access databases.

Parallel network views

It is possible to select the used network view independently in each program instance(workstation). The user has the possibility to create a new view by moving and hidingnodes and lines in the main view without overwriting already existing data. For example,a parallel schematic diagram can be created (orthogonal schema) to make networkoperation clear and effective but exact locations of objects can be viewed on a map usinga geographic view. All views can use the real time network coloring to show the stateof the network as before.

Switch state quality (status) separated from switch state

Separate symbols can be defined for uncertain switch states (open, uncertain or closed,uncertain). These symbols are used when the switch state is known in the SCADAdatabase but quality is uncertain. In the OPC interface this means that OPC qualityQUALITY_UNCERTAIN used, and in the SCIL API interface the status values 1, 2 or3 are used. The OPC quality QUALITY_BAD or status 10 (not sampled) cause the stateof the switch to be shown as error, as before. The user can define if uncertain state willcause network coloring to use unknown color. Error state will always cause unknowncoloring.

Manual state update for switches connected to SCADA

Disconnectors and circuit breakers that normally reserve the state from SCADA can bemoved to manual state update in DMS 600. This can be used as a temporary solution,for example, to see known state in DMS 600 if communication to station is broken andSCADA is not showing the known state. There are separate symbol definitions for closedand open, manually updatable switches.

Distribution Contingency analysis

The user can define sequences that can be used to check if the system is capable ofhandling known fault situations with present loads. For example, the sequence can checkwhether there are acceptable back-up feeds when some main transformers have to beswitched off. The power of generators and motors can be changed in the study, too.

22

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 23: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Power values for motors and generators

Real time measurement values from SCADA can be linked to motors and generators sothat the load flow calculation in state monitoring mode can use measured values. In thesimulations the user of WS can change the values with simulation dialogs.

IED (relay) modeling

For documentation purposes the network database can include data for any kinds ofprotection and control devices. For example, distance and differential protection deviceswith their properties and setting values data can be added. The user can define additionaldata fields for any protection devices.

LIB 500 not required anymore

DMS 600 can be used with SYS 600 without installing LIB 500. The tools that wereearlier available only when also LIB 500 was installed are now available without a LIB500 installation.

Improved fault management

• Switching to another fault instance is faster than before since all existing faults arein main memory.

• Operation is faster when there are several unrepaired faults since switch state changesare not anymore stored to each fault file. For reporting the switch state changes areread from the event log instead of the fault files.

• The Fault Management dialog is resizable. For example, the list presentation ofpresent faults can be increased so that more information can be seen at the sametime.

• Extreme conditions switch is added. When there are a lot of simultaneous faults andlots of switch state changes, the operation of the system can be changed by pressingone button so that the screen update interval is increased and automatic load flowafter changes is switched off.

Customer service points in MV network

A customer service point can be added to the MV network to represent a so called MVcustomer that has their own transformers. The load or energy data can be given for aservice point so that the service point will be included in the load flow calculation withoutmodeling MV/LV transformers owned by the customer.

23

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 24: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Generic OPC DA client

The DMS 600 OPC DA client can be used with any compatible OPC DA server to getreal time switch states and measurements to DMS. However, alarm indications can beobtained with OPC DA only from MicroSCADA Pro SYS 600 by using SYS 600 specificalarm attributes.

Extended tracing functionality

The user has a possibility to view all switching devices along the selected trace in thetracing order. The list shows the type and the existing state of each switch. Through thisdialog a selected switch can be located and it’s switching state can be changed. If thestate of any of the switches in the list is changed, the dialog becomes outdated and thetrace coloring will be cancelled and the dialog closed. The network window can bezoomed to show all line sections included in the trace to easily see how far the tracecontinues in the network. This zoom function is available in same shortcut menu wheretrace functions are located.

Network presentation enhancements

A radial network fed by a circuit breaker but not having any loads connected can bepresented with a special no-load color. This helps the user to see which circuit breakerscan be opened without harm. There is a different symbol for unsupplied primary trans-formers. This clarifies the network view and switching operations on substations. Adashed line can be used for coloring an unsupplied (no voltage) network.

New features and functions in DMS 600 4.13.3.

The table below lists the main new features in 4.1.

Table 3.3-1 New features and functions in DMS 600 4.1More InformationNew Feature or Function

13.1, General about switching planningAdvanced Switch Order Management

6.4.1, General about network windowsNetwork coloring by nominal voltage levels

6.4.4, Coloring of network windowsFixed colors for main transformers and feeders

14.4.4, Manual creation of MV outage reportFaults without opened circuit-breaker to outagereporting

11.5.6, Changing voltage value in feeding sub-stations

Changing feeding voltage in simulation

11.5.2, Changing switching stateChecking voltage levels and transformer phasorgroups

???Load-protection coordination

24

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 25: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

More InformationNew Feature or Function

7.8.2.7, Impedance-based earth fault locationsettings and 12.5.2, Fault distance calculation

Impedance based fault location for earth faultsin isolated or compensated networks

See chapter "Licenses" in System Overview orin System Administration.

License structure changed. The module "OutageReporting and Statistics" can be added withoutthe module fault location.

25

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 26: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

User and region management4.

General about user and region management4.1.

Login and logout functions in DMS 600 WS are based on user identifiers (username andpassword).

Network data can be divided into several regions according to primary transformers andgenerators. The total amount of primary transformers and generators defines the maximumnumber of regions.

User right levels can be defined for each region separately. User identifiers, regions anduser levels for regions are defined by the administrator. For more information aboutregion and user level management, see System Administration. After a successful login,network windows show the medium voltage network which associates with regions thatthe user has rights to view. The program operates according to the rights given to theuser that is logged in.

Logoff mode4.2.

If login is quitted or failed during start up, DMS 600 WS will return to the logoff mode.DMS 600 WS also returns to the logoff mode after you select File > Logoff. You canlogin with the menu command File > Login.

DMS 600 software has very strictly restricted functions in the logoff mode. The operationof DMS 600 WS in the logoff mode is restricted to the following:• Viewing of the medium voltage network switching state• Viewing of the fault list (fault location is not working)• Zooming and panning of the network window• Login to the software• Most menu commands are disabled• Restricted closing of the DMS 600 WS.

If you close DMS 600 WS in the logoff mode, user logoff isperformed in the optionally associated MicroSCADA monitorwindow. Afterwards the monitor can be used normally butbefore any control actions can be done you must login toMicroSCADA again by selecting Main > Login from theMicroSCADA menu.

User level rights4.3.

DMS 600 contains five user levels with different rights:

26

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 27: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Table 4.3-1 User level rightsUser RightsUser LevelNumber

Administrator, all rightsAdmin1

Control rightsCommon User2

View rightsGuest3

No view rightsNo view rights4

View rights + FindingsCustomer Servant5

The user name "Admin" always has all rights for every region and every action regardlessof later definitions.

The user needs control rights, for example, to carry out switching operations.

The user level with no viewing rights can be used to prevent the user from viewing thenetwork of a special region.

If a user does not have sufficient rights to perform an action,the action will be disabled in the user interface but the usercan still see it.

Regions4.4.

DMS 600 software uses three different types of regions:• Dynamic region contains all supplied network components of the primary transformer

or generator in the current switching state. The content of a region changes dynam-ically according to the switching state. Any unsupplied section of the network is notincluded in the region.

• Normal region contains all network components in the normal switching state (alsothe unsupplied network components). The content of normal region is saved auto-matically when the normal switching state is saved in DMS 600 WS (for moreinformation about saving normal switching state, see 8.4.2, Updating normalswitching state).

• Extra regions can be defined to contain freely chosen network components andnodes. This makes it possible, for example, to control the same switching devicefrom the control rooms of several regions.

To carry out a switching operation, the user needs the controlrights to only one region type (dynamic, normal or extraregion).

27

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 28: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Starting DMS 600 WS5.

Starting DMS 600 WS5.1.

DMS 600 WS is normally started from SYS 600 menu Tools > DMS 600 Workstation(Open++ Opera > OperaWS in older MicroSCADA versions). SYS 600 logininformation is used automatically. If the username and password entered in SYS 600login do not match, the username and the password are required (for more informationabout user levels, see System Administration). Last successful login username is proposedin the Login window.

DMS 600 WS can also be started by double-clicking the DMS 600 WS icon or the filenamed OperaWS.exe in file manager. In this case, the integration to MicroSCADA isdefective.

DMS 600 WS can be started also from the start menu using the program group addedduring installation (for more information about the program group, see InstallationManual. However, to be able to open classic monitor graphics from DMS 600 WS, theprogram must be started from the classic monitor menu. The way the Monitor Prographics are opened is not dependent on how DMS 600 WS is started.

If DMS 600 WS is started but the program is in the logoff state, select File > Login.

During the start up process from MicroSCADA, DMS 600 WS:1. Tests the connection to the primary fileserver. If the primary fileserver is disconnec-

ted, DMS 600 WS tests the connection to the secondary fileserver. If the secondaryfileserver is not responding, an error message is displayed and DMS 600 WS shutsdown.

2. Tests the connection to the MicroSCADA system. If the connection is OK, DMS600 WS reads the real time status of the switches (from the DMS 600 database)obtained from MicroSCADA via DMS 600 SA or OPC Data Access. If the connec-tion to MicroSCADA is not in use, a message is displayed and the last statuses ofthe switches are read from the DMS 600 database. While disconnected, changes inthe statuses of the switches are saved to the DMS 600 database. After reconnectingto MicroSCADA, the real time statuses of the switches are obtained by DMS 600SA or OPC Data Access.

3. Loads the medium voltage distribution network data from the binary network fileand the temporary network data from the temporary network file.

4. Creates a medium voltage distribution network topology from the distribution net-work data, temporary network data and the statuses of the switches.

5. Performs the network and protection analysis of the present network topology.6. Represents the medium voltage distribution network, colored according to the

switching state of the feeders in the network window and according to the voltage

28

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 29: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

drops in the auxiliary network window (the default views can be changed duringprojecting).

7. Checks for and announces if any new fault has occurred while disconnected. If newunrepaired faults are found, DMS 600 WS asks if the faults should be displayed onthe screen.

Upon completing start up, DMS 600 WS is in State Monitoring Mode. If login is canceledor failed software starts in logoff mode (for more information about logoff mode, see4.2, Logoff mode). During the Simulation Mode or Switching Planning Mode, the ESCkey returns DMS 600 WS to this mode.

To log off, select File > Logoff and to close the software, select File > Exit.

29

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 30: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

User interface6.

General about user interface6.1.

In the user interface data is represented in dialog boxes, lists, graphics-based networkwindows and diagrams, geographic maps, and colors. You can select functions frommenus and submenus that are controlled with the mouse and keyboard, or with toolbarbuttons. The dialog boxes contain scrolling bars, list boxes, check boxes, option buttons,command buttons, and other elements similar to MS Windows user interfaces.

The user interface of DMS 600 WS consists of title bar, menu, toolbar, status bar, andmain and auxiliary network windows showing the distribution network. The toolbar canbe hidden with the Window > Toolbar command . If not restricted by the administrator,the Window > Arrange Windows command arranges the windows back to their presetplaces.

If the pointer is held for a moment over a toolbar button, a description of the functionpops up near the button. At the same time, text describing the function is displayed onthe status bar.

To display a shortcut menu, right-click the main network window. The menu contentdepends on the position of the mouse.

To open the Print shortcut menu, right-click any list window. The command opens aseparate window for saving or printing the list data. The width of columns can be changedin the preview window. The font used in printing is the defined Base font (for moreinformation about font definitions, see 7.3.3, User interface fonts settings).

Workstation status bar6.2.

The DMS 600 workstation status bar is divided into three separate panes. The first paneis dedicated to application messages and function descriptions. The second pane showsthe active operation mode (for more information, see 8.2, Selecting operational modes).The third pane shows the main status of application connections. This value is a combin-ation of several options based on the environment configuration. Combinations wherethe value is 'Online' are presented in the following table. In all other cases, the status textis 'Offline', and the indicator color is red. A yellow indicator color is used when someof the available communication interfaces are not in ‘Online’ state.

Table 6.2-1 Application status valuesStatus textIndicator

colorMessage ser-vice

OPC InterfaceSCADA Inter-face

ServerApplication

OnlineGreenOnline--Online

OnlineGreenOnlineOnline-Online

30

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 31: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Status textIndicatorcolor

Message ser-vice

OPC InterfaceSCADA Inter-face

ServerApplication

OnlineYellowOnlineOnlineOnlineOnline

OnlineGreenOnline-OnlineOnline

OnlineYellowOnlineOfflineOnlineOnline

OnlineGreenOnlineOnlineOnlineOnline

• "-" means not in use

If the mouse pointer is held over the third pane, a detailed description of the connectionstates is displayed in the tooltip.

User interface settings6.3.

The outlook and location of map material can be set workstation-specifically in everyDMS 600 software. The background maps can also be disabled via the Settings> Maps> Outlook command (for more information about outlook and storage of the backgroundmaps, see 7.9.2, Outlook of background maps and 7.9.3, Storage location of backgroundmaps).

Free database layout can be set network component or object-specifically using thefunctions in the appropriate data form. For more information about free data form layout,see 8.7.4, Content of free data forms.

The administrator can specify the symbols, line colors and background color used in thenetwork windows and diagrams. DMS 600 software uses geographic maps as the back-ground for the distribution network. The administrator can set background map usage.For more information about administrator settings, see System Administration. The sizeand location of most windows can be changed. The state of the windows (visibility, sizeand location) is saved when quitting the program.

Network windows6.4.

General about network windows6.4.1.

DMS 600 represents the distribution network in two network windows. The auxiliarynetwork window always shows the whole network or selected region(s). The view of alow voltage network with a very accurate zoom is an exception. In that case, the auxiliarynetwork window shows a more general view from the appropriate low voltage network.The main network window shows a specific area of the network in more detail. The areacovered by the main network window is shown as a rectangle in the auxiliary networkwindow. Normally the medium voltage network is visible in network windows. Lowvoltage networks are always read separately to the memory.

31

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 32: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

If you hold the mouse cursor for a moment over a network node or a line section in themain network window, a tool tip is opened presenting information about the node or linesection, and real and reactive powers defined by the network analysis.

Controlling the views in network windows6.4.2.

Network windows can be zoomed and panned. If not restricted by the administrator, thesize and location of network windows can be changed. This information is saved duringthe shutdown of the program.

The network view shown in the main network window can be changed by:• Choosing the area from either network window by clicking the left mouse button

down on one corner of the area and releasing it on the opposite corner (zooming).• Grasping the rectangle of the auxiliary network window with the right mouse button

and dragging it to the new location.• Clicking the left mouse button to the center of the new location in the auxiliary

network window. The rectangle of the auxiliary network window moves to thepointed new location.

• Right-clicking the main network window, moving the mouse in the desired direction,and releasing it (panning).

• Zooming the main network window step by step with View > Zoom In or View >Zoom Out commands or returning to the previous zoom with View > Zoom Previ-ous command (or with Previous Zoom shortcut menu command).

• Click the middle mouse button (or wheel) in the main network window to definethe center point for the new location of the zoom area

• Scrolling the mouse to zoom the main network window in and out. You can dis-able/enable the mouse scroll wheel zooming by keeping the shift button down andat the same time rotating the mouse scroll wheel at least 6 clicks. Further, you canchange the mouse scroll zooming mode (direction) by keeping the CTRL-buttondown while rotating the mouse scroll wheel a few times.

• Zooming out the main network window by keeping the shift button down and at thesame time clicking one corner of the area, dragging and releasing the button in theopposite corner.

When View > Zoom All is selected the main network window will show the wholenetwork in case All Regions (default) is selected, or no regions have been defined. Ifone specific region is selected, the network associating to that region will be visible inthe main window.

SYS 600 zooming functions open DMS 600 WS client and zoom the main networkwindow step by step. Right-click any process object in SYS 600 station graphic andselect Zoom In or Zoom Out command from the popup menu.

View > Save/Restore Zoom... to enable the management of the zoom views in a separatedialog:• Save zoom saves the current view of the main network window by the name written

into Zoom name box

32

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 33: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

• Delete zoom deletes the selected zoom view• Restore zoom restores the selected zoom view into the main network window• Cancel restores the previous zoom before opening the dialog• Close closes the dialog keeping the last restored zoom view in the main network

window

Operational zooming6.4.3.

System specific zooms6.4.3.1.

It is possible to define system specific operational zoom areas in DMS 600.

To save and restore the system specific zoom areas:1. Select the View > Save/Restore Zoom... to open the Save / Restore Zoom dialog,

then select the Share tab.2. Move to the zoom area you want to save and click Save zoom button on Save /

Restore Zoom dialog to save the current view of the main network window by thename written into Zoom name box.

3. To delete a selected zoom, click Delete zoom button in the Save / Restore Zoomdialog.

4. To restore a selected zoom into the main network window, click Restore zoombutton in the Save / Restore Zoom dialog.

5. Cancel restores the previous zoom before opening the dialog.6. To hide the Save / Restore Zoom dialog, select View > Temporary Zooms >

Hide/Show Save / Restore Zoom Dialog (Alt+V).7. To close the dialog, click Close.

Session specific zooms6.4.3.2.

Session specific operational zoom areas can be saved and restored in DMS 600.

To save and restore the session specific zoom areas:1. Select the View > Save/Restore Zoom... to open the Save / Restore Zoom dialog,

then select the Temporary tab.2. Move to the zoom area you want to save and select View > Temporary Zooms >

Save Temporary Zoom... (Alt+S).3. Enter a name for the zoom, and click Save. All the zoom names you save appear in

the temporary zoom list.4. To restore a zoom area, select View > Temporary Zooms > Restore Next Tem-

porary Zoom (Alt+X) or Restore Previous Temporary Zoom (Alt+Z).The next temporary zoom from the list is restored to the main network window.When you reach the end of the zoom list, 'next zoom' jumps back to the beginningof the list.

33

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 34: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

The previous temporary zoom from the list is restored to the main network window.When you reach the start of the zoom list, 'previous zoom' jumps back to the end ofthe list.

5. To hide the Save / Restore Zoom dialog, select View > Temporary Zooms >Hide/Show Save / Restore Zoom Dialog (Alt+V).

6. To close the dialog, click Close.

Coloring of network windows6.4.4.

The information displayed in the two network windows can be chosen using the submenusin the View > Coloring menu. The functions focus on the active network window.

The colors represent different kinds of information. The colors of network lines aredefined in DMS 600 NE. It is possible to define fixed and pre-selected pen colors andpen widths for primary transformers and for the MV-feeders. The fixed colors areavailable parallel to dynamically changing network colors. When presenting feedertopology (View > Coloring > Topology by Feeders), adjacent feeders are colored witha separate color so that an open switch is easy to find. Cold lines, lines in looped connec-tions, earthed and uncertain/unknown lines are presented with separate colors. Maintransformer topology (View > Coloring > Topology by Primary Transformers) andconductor types according to predefined classification (View > Coloring > Line Types)are presented. MV voltage levels (View > Coloring > Voltage levels) can be presentedwith different colors. An extra window with color information is opened onto the screenif needed.

The symbols of MV/LV transformers and substations (diagrams) can be drawn with thedefined feeder color regardless of the selected coloring option. The color of symbols,including subsymbols and special symbols, is changed to match the feeder color. Youcan turn this coloring option on and off by selecting View > Coloring > Use FeederColors For MV/LV Substations.

You can switch between fixed and dynamic coloring modes by clicking View > Coloring> Use Fixed Colors or by clicking the Fix button in the toolbar.

The function Use Fixed Colors is common for the coloring modes Topology by PrimaryTransformers and Topology by Feeders. It is common also for the network windows.When Use Fixed Colors is selected, a line color legend appears to show the definedcolors for the Feeders / Primary Transformers that are visible in the primary networkwindow.

View > Feeder command enables the selection of the feeder by the name or code. Theselected feeder is shown in the main network with a warning color, automatically zoomedto the feeder area. Meshed network feeders cannot be zoomed.

34

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 35: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

View > Show > Unsupplied MV/LV Stations command shows the unsupplied MV/LVstations, View > Show > Remote Disconnectors command shows the remotely operatedswitches and View > Show > Transformer Switches command causes the transformerswitches to be represented with white symbols in the network window. The functionfocuses on the active switching state.

Unsupplied line sections can be drawn using the dashed line. For more information, seeSystem Administration Manual.

Sections fed by one circuit breaker but not having any loads connected can be presentedusing a specific no-load color and line width. For more information, see SystemAdministration Manual.

Displaying conductor codes and line types6.4.5.

To display conductor codes, select View > Show > Conductor Codes.

To view the conductors by the line types defined for each conductor, select the menuoption View > Show > Show Conductors by Line Types.

Hiding voltage levels6.4.6.

It is possible to hide selected MV levels. When hidden the levels are not shown in anyof the coloring modes. Hiding is done in the dialog that includes the list of all MV levels.To hide the selected levels, select View > Coloring > Hide voltages….

Coloring in network and protection analysis6.4.7.

DMS 600 WS includes a network and protection analysis function. According to theresults of the network and protection analysis the network lines can be colored in mainor auxiliary network window to indicate:• Voltage drops in medium and low voltage networks (View > Coloring > Voltage

Drops).• Detection ability of short-circuit protection in medium voltage networks (View >

Coloring > Detection Ability to Overcurrent Fault) and fault current/fuse valuein low voltage networks (View > Coloring > Fault Current/Fuse).

• 3-phase short-circuit capacity in medium voltage networks (View > Coloring > 3-phase Short circuit Capacity) and the detection of short-circuit protection in lowvoltage networks (View > Coloring > Short circuit Protection).

• Detection ability of earth-fault protection in medium voltage networks (View >Coloring > Earth Fault Protection).

• Load levels in medium voltage networks (View > Coloring > Load Levels) anddetection of overload protection in low voltage networks (View > Coloring >Overload Protection).

35

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 36: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

For more information about network and protection analysis results, see 11.2.7, Showingnetwork analysis result and 11.3.5, Showing protection analysis results of given faultlocation.

Warning level and alarm level colors are used to present network and protection analysisresults when the calculated values exceed the corresponding settings for the limits. Theway the calculation results are presented depends on the network coloring limits (formore information about network coloring limits, see 7.5.3, Settings of coloring limitsfor network and protection analysis). During the representation of calculation or analysisresults, white is used to represent the lines which cannot be calculated because of thelack of source information (for example earth-fault relay data).

Code and label controls6.4.8.

The presentation of network component codes and labels assists in finding the networkcomponent in the network.

The View > Show > Substation Labels command contains a submenu for definingcodes or labels of the substations shown in the network window. View > Show > MV/LVStation Labels, View > Show > Switch Labels, View > Show > Motor Labels, View> Show > Generator Labels, View > Show > Circuit Breaker Labels, View > Show> Primary Transformer Labels and View > Show > Feeder Labels commands containsubmenus for defining codes or labels of the appropriate network components to beshown. The switch codes and labels in the medium voltage level correspond to customercodes and names in the low voltage level.

The system-specific color settings of the codes and names are defined during TrueTypesymbol definition in DMS 600 NE or with Settings > General command (for moreinformation about symbol definition, see System Administration. The state of presentationof the codes and labels is saved when quitting the program.

Showing free database objects, texts and measurements6.4.9.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Extended Data Management license is required for freedatabase objects, texts and measurements.

The View > Show >Object Types command opens a dialog box for defining the visib-ility of free database object types and measurements in the network window (for moreinformation about measurements, see 8.19.2, Inserting the value for additional load andborder switch and System Administration.

The symbols and/or labels used to show the free database object types, text object typesand measurements are defined in a similar way to other symbols of the network compon-

36

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 37: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

ents in DMS 600 NE (for more information about measurement definition, see SystemAdministration). Free database object types can also be represented with symbols in theauxiliary network window.

Symbol legend6.4.10.

Selecting Window > Symbol Legend opens a window showing the symbols visible inthe main network window. The symbols are defined in DMS 600 NE (for more inform-ation about symbol definition, see System Administration).

Line color legend6.4.11.

Clicking Window > Line Color Legend opens a window showing the line colors usedin the network windows. The line colors are defined in DMS 600 NE (for more inform-ation about definition of line colors, see System Administration.

If View > Coloring > Use Fixed Colors is selected, a separate line color legend appears.The legend shows the defined fixed colors if the coloring mode is "Topology by PrimaryTransformers" or "Topology by Feeders".

If the fixed pen color and pen width are undefined for a Feeder or Primary Transformer,the dynamic pen will be used, even if the option Use Fixed Colors was selected. Anundefined fixed color is indicated with “(*)”. A comment can be seen in the separateline color legend.

Parallel network views6.5.

A network presentation can consist of several parallel views that can be loaded independ-ently in each DMS 600 WS. For more information on network views, see SystemAdministration manual, Parallel network views.

To load a parallel network view:1. Select File > Load network view.2. Select the view you want to load.

Network diagrams6.6.

General about network diagrams6.6.1.

DMS 600 software can also present selected parts of a network as diagrams. A networkdiagram is generated automatically using the existing network data so that no specialtasks are needed during network data entry.

37

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 38: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

The network diagram window opens automatically when you click Diagram in theshortcut menu that opens when you right-click the network location in the main networkwindow. The size of the diagram can be modified.

Use the left mouse button to select a node or line section for closer observation. TheNode information dialog opens.

help0010.jpg

Figure 6.6.1-1 An example of a network diagram

Coloring in network diagrams6.6.2.

The colors and symbols used in the network diagram window are the same as in thefeeder topology presentation mode of the network window (View > Coloring > Topologyby Feeders).

When View > Coloring > Use Fixed Colors is selected, the fixed colors are used alsoin network diagrams.

Codes and labels in network diagrams6.6.3.

MV/LV station and switch codes are always shown in the network diagram. Codes arereplaced with labels when they are selected to be displayed in the network window.

38

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 39: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Station diagrams6.7.

General about station diagrams6.7.1.

With station diagrams you can handle station components in greater detail and show theswitching states of station components.

DMS 600 WS uses two kinds of station diagram presentations:• Station and control pictures from MicroSCADA and• Internal station diagrams.

A particular symbol in the network window means that the object includes a stationdiagram presentation. Codes or names of the substations displayed in the network windowcan be defined in the submenu of the View > Show > Substation Labels menu.

Station and control pictures6.7.2.

Station and control pictures are used for controlling the states of switches.

To open the MicroSCADA station or control picture in a separate window in the StateMonitoring Mode of DMS 600 WS:1. Right-click the corresponding symbol or the station diagram in the network window.2. Click Diagram in the shortcut menu.

The View > Station Diagram command can also be used to open separate station diagramwindows. Type in the name of the station you wish to open in the diagram window. Itis possible to have several internal station diagram windows open at the same time.

MicroSCADA control dialogs6.7.3.

When SYS 600 configuration files for switches are available, the SYS 600 switch controldialog can be opened directly by selecting the remotely operated switch in the networkwindow or diagram or in the switch device lists. SYS 600 control dialogs can be usedfor control actions. In an opened control dialog the user has control rights only if theusername and password in DMS 600 match the user information in SYS 600 and if theuser is authorized to control the selected switch.

Internal station diagrams6.7.4.

Internal station diagrams are used for managing station component data during simula-tions. DMS 600 NE uses only internal station diagrams. Normally internal station dia-grams are imported from MicroSCADA. Station diagrams can also be created in DMS600 NE (for more information about creation of station diagrams in DMS 600 NE, seeSystem Administration.

39

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 40: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Internal station diagrams can be viewed in the network window when zooming closeenough to a station.

To show the internal station diagram window in the Simulation Mode:1. Right-click the symbol or station diagram in the network window.2. Select Diagram in the shortcut menu.

The station diagram window can also be opened by selecting View > Station Diagram.Type in the name of the station you wish to open in the diagram window. It is possibleto have several stations diagram windows opened at the same time.

Coloring in station diagrams6.7.5.

The colors of the root points of feeders in the MicroSCADA station and control picturesin DMS 600 WS are the same as in the feeder topology presentation mode (View >Coloring > Topology by Feeders).

The colors of the feeders and symbols in internal station diagram windows in the Simu-lation Mode are the same as in the feeder topology presentation mode of the networkwindow.

Other fixed medium and low voltage diagrams6.8.

General about other fixed medium and low voltage diagrams6.8.1.

Other medium and low voltage network diagrams can also be created in DMS 600 NE.These diagrams contain network objects that can be shown more accurately in the diagrammode (for example MV/LV stations and disconnector stations). This type of connectionbetween network objects is called a site node. For more information about defining dia-grams, see System Administration.

To display the diagrams in more detail, zoom in close enough. To open the fixed diagramwindow:1. Open a shortcut menu by right-clicking the site node in the main network window.2. Select Diagram in the shortcut menu.

The administrator can set a dynamic network diagram to open instead of a fixed diagramwhen Diagram is selected (for more information about configuring the way the diagramsare opened in DMS 600 NE, see System Administration for more information aboutconfiguring the way the diagrams are opened, see System Administration.

You can switch the type of opened diagram window by holding down CTRL key andsimultaneously clicking Diagram.

40

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 41: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Online help6.9.

DMS 600 has an Online Help. It contains the following functions:• Help > Contents and Index starts the online help. The help navigator contains four

tabs:• Contents shows the contents of the DMS 600 WS Help• Index shows the index list of the DMS 600 WS Help• Find enables full text search• Favorites enables the definition of favorite pages

• Help > What's This? changes the pointer into a question mark and after the userclicks a place on the screen, a help window about the chosen function pops up.

• Help > About opens a window that shows DMS 600 version information. Thiscommand also prints the license information to the alarms list.

The online help can also be opened by:• Pressing the F1 key. The help displays the help window associated to the active

function of the program.• Clicking Help in some dialog boxes. The help displays the help window associated

to the active dialog box.

The user interface of the help contains a navigator, toolbar and the actual content. Youcan open the shortcut menu by right-clicking in the help screen.

41

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 42: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Settings of workstations7.

General about settings7.1.

Workstation settings must be updated in the State Monitoring Mode of DMS 600 WS.The primary settings of DMS 600 WS are workstation-specific, only a few setting aresystem-specific and affect all workstations. The system asks for confirmation for system-specific settings before implementing them.

If the settings are changed in the Simulation Mode, they are only temporarily updatedon the workstation. All definitions and saved settings are returned when returning to thenormal mode.

Settings that affect all workstation programs (instances of DMS 600 NE and DMS 600WS), are mainly set in DMS 600 NE. For more information about system specific settings,see System Administration.

User manager settings7.2.

Controlling user rights7.2.1.

Select Settings > User Manager to manage user infrormation and user rights. Usernames, descriptions and user manager admin rights are displayed in the User Managerdialog.

Depending on the user manager admin rights of the logged-in user, the following tasksare enabled in the User Manager dialog:

Table 7.2.1-1 User manager admin rightsTasksUser Manager Admin

• Adding, editing and deleting user information and user rightsYes

• Viewing user's own information• Changing user's own password

No

Changing user identifiers or user rights7.2.2.

To add or change user information or user rights, you mustlog in with User Manager Admin rights.

To add or change user information and user rights:1. Select Add New or Edit. The User Properties dialog opens.

42

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 43: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

2. If a new user is added, define first the username. Then add a description and passwordfor the user. Confirm the password.The length of the user name and the password must be 4 to 20 characters.

3. Define User Manager Admin rights by selecting Yes or No.4. Click User Levels for Regions to change the user levels for regions. User Levels

for Regions dialog opens. The dialog shows all defined regions and user levels foreach region. The default value for the regions is zero, which means that the highestuser level will be used.

5. Click Change User Level to change the user level for the selected region.6. Define the rights for user manager.

To delete a user identifier, click Delete first in the User Manager dialog and then in theUser Properties dialog.

DMS 600 passwords are now case-sensitive. In addition, thefollowing special characters are accepted: % * . – _ .

Changing password7.2.3.

To change your password when you do not have User Manager Admin rights:1. Select Change password. The User Properties dialog opens.2. Define the new password and confirm it.

The length of the password must be 4 to 20 characters.

DMS 600 passwords are now case-sensitive. In addition, thefollowing special characters are accepted: % * . – _ .

Network view settings7.3.

General about network view settings7.3.1.

Many of the network view settings (for example symbol's zooming range, the switchingstate of primary feeders, the indication of loops and generator loops) are system-specificand can be changed in DMS 600 NE (for more information about system specific settings,see System Administration.

User interface language settings7.3.2.

It is possible to change the language of the user interface and online help used in eachworkstation during the runtime. The language selected during the runtime is saved foreach workstation and program, and will be the new default language at the next startup.

43

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 44: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Select the language from the submenu of Settings > Languages.

For more information about the localization of the DMS 600 software, see SystemAdministration.

User interface fonts settings7.3.3.

Fonts used in the user interface in each workstation can be defined during the runtime.Default fonts are used if no other fonts are defined. Default fonts are defined in DMS600 (for more information about default fonts, see System Administration

To define the fonts:1. Select Settings > Fonts.2. Select the desired tab. Use the scrolling arrows to scroll the tabs if needed. Base

and Base Fixed tabs are used to define the fonts used mainly in listings and listprinting. Network window tab is used to define the fonts used in network windows.Dialog tab is used to define the fonts in the dialog texts.

3. Define the used font by clicking Define Font or click Get Defaults to reload thedefault fonts.

4. If you are defining a new font, select the font and the size. The selected font will beset immediately in the current session. Click Cancel to restore the previous fonts.

Some fonts used in the user interface cannot be changed inSettings > Fonts. These include the fonts used in menus,window title bars, tool tips etc. These fonts can be set byselecting Control Panel, Display and Appearance tab. TheItem drop down list contains the items to be set and the Fontand Size drop down lists the selected font and size.

Local network view settings7.3.4.

To define the local workstation-specific network view settings in the following manner:1. Select Settings > General.2. Select the Local tab. Use the scrolling arrows to scroll the tabs if needed.

Table 7.3.4-1 Local network view settingsNote:Function:Box:

The value is the width of thearea in km shown in the win-dow.

The default value is 10.

Can be set also in DMS 600NE with the Settings > Net-work View command.

Defines the zoom limit belowwhich the MV/LV station andMV switch codes or names areshown in the main networkwindow (if defined to be shownwith commands under View >Show).

MV Codes visible when zoom<(km)

44

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 45: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Note:Function:Box:

The value is the width of thearea in km shown in the win-dow.

The default value is 1.

Can be set also in DMS 600NE with the Settings > Net-work View command.

Defines the zoom limit belowwhich the customer codes ornames are shown in the mainnetwork window (if defined tobe shown with commandsunder View > Show).

LV Node ID's visible whenzoom <(km)

The default value is on.Defines if the node informationis shown with the separate dia-log box after selection of anode.

Show node information dialog

Alarming after selection of theswitch (for more informationabout checking switchingactions, see 9.1.3, Monitoringnetwork topology).

Defines if the checking oflooped connections or connec-tions to earthed network aremade.

Check Switching Actions

List includes all circuit break-ers, disconnectors and fuses.

List of switches along thetraced line sections in the tra-cing order.

Show switching devices alongtrace

Automatic functions associated with state changes7.4.

Defining automatic function settings7.4.1.

To define the local workstation-specific automatic function settings:1. Select Settings > General.2. Select the Local tab. Use the scrolling arrows to scroll the tabs if needed.3. Define the settings for automatic function associated with state changes according

to the following table:

Table 7.4.1-1 Settings for automatic function associated with state changeNote:Function:Box:

If topology analysis is unavail-able, the text "no autom.updating" is shown in thesecond pane of the status barat the bottom of the screen.

If the radial load flow calcula-tion is turned on, then topologyanalysis is automaticallyenabled.

The topology can be updatedwith the Analyze > RefreshTopology command

Defines that the topology ana-lysis is always run if the stateof a switch is changed and theworkstation is in State Monitor-ing Mode.

Topology analysis

45

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 46: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Note:Function:Box:

If topology analysis is unavail-able, then the radial load flowcalculation is automaticallyunavailable.

The load flow calculation canbe updated with the Analyze >Network & Protection com-mand.

Defines that the radial load flowcalculations are always run ifthe state of a switch is changedand the workstation is in StateMonitoring Mode.

Radial load flow

If not selected a new fault willonly appear in the Fault man-agement dialog box. If no Faultmanagement dialog is open, anew dialog will open.

Defines if a network windowautomatically zooms, in case anew fault appears.

Fault location (user)

Defines if any of the automaticfault management functions willbe performed at the currentinstance of DMS 600 WS.

Fault location (workstation)

Meshed network calculation isperformed after calculation ofthe radial feeders if the timeinterval has elapsed from lastcalculation.

Defines that the meshed net-work load flow and maximumshort-circuit current calculationsare automatically executed ifthe state of a switch is changedand the workstation is in StateMonitoring Mode.

Meshed network analysis

Defines the time interval forscreen updates.

The Minimum interval betweenscreen updates (s)

Defines the time interval forscreen updates in the Disturb-ance Mode.

The Minimum interval betweenscreen updates (Disturbancemode) (s)

Defines the time interval formeshed network calculations.

Minimum interval betweenmeshed network load flows (s)

Whatever the settings for these automatic functions are, DMS600 WS observes the changes in switch states and saves theinformation. These settings only define how the screen isupdated.

When automatic updating is unavailable, the switching state and the load flow calculationresults are updated on the screen once an hour.

The disabling of automatic updating may be useful, for example, during a storm, whenthere can be a large number of simultaneous events.

46

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 47: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Automatic GSM message settings in fault cases7.4.2.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.GSM Messages sublicense is required for GSM messages.

To define the automatic GSM message sending in fault cases:1. Select Fault > SMS messages or click SMS Messages/Answering Machine in the

Fault Management dialog. The SMS messages dialog opens. Also the AnsweringMachine dialog may open depending on the settings.

2. Select Automatic message generation.

The workstation defined to handle the automatic GSM mes-sages should not be used in the Simulation Mode since it pre-vents the automatic sending of GSM messages.

Automatic telephone answering machine using in fault cases7.4.3.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.Ttelephone answering machine sublicense is required fortelephone answering machine functions.

To define the automatic telephone answering machine:1. Select Fault > Messages. The Automatic customer messages dialog opens.2. Click Automatic messages to activate the automatic telephone answering machine

for customer calls.3. Click Automatic message generation. DMS 600 WS automatically generates a

message in the case of a new fault. The message is removed automatically when thefault has been repaired.

The workstation defined to handle the telephone answeringmachine should not be be used in Simulation Mode since itprevents the automatic answering machine functions.

47

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 48: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Color settings7.5.

General about color settings7.5.1.

Almost all network color definitions are system-specific (for more information aboutsystem specific settings, see System Administration).

The following system-specific color settings can be changed in DMS 600 NE:• MV/LV Station, switch and customer code color• Symbol colors• Background map colors• Background color for network windows and diagrams• Network line color, line width and possibility to use dashed line for unsupplied lines• Warning and alarming colors• Line type colors and division.

MV/LV station, switch and customer code color settings7.5.2.

To define the system-specific color settings for MV/LV station, switch and customercodes:1. Select Settings > General.2. Select the Network Color Settings tab. Use the scrolling arrows to scroll the tabs

if needed.3. Click the button after MV/LV Station Codes or Switch Codes to set the colors of

MV/LV station and switch codes or names used in the network windows.

The color of the MV/LV station codes is also used for theconductor codes in the network window and for descriptiontexts in the Symbol Legend window. The symbol-specificcolor definitions done in DMS 600 NE override the generalcolor settings of MV/LV stations and switch codes.

Settings of coloring limits for network and protection analysis7.5.3.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license is required for network andprotection analysis.

48

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 49: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

To define the workstation-specific coloring limits for network and protection analysisresults:1. Select Settings > MV Network Color Limits or Settings > LV Network Color

Limits.2. Select the desired tab. Use the scrolling arrows to scroll the tabs if needed.3. Insert the limits for showing the network and protection analysis results.

For more information about the results of network and protection analysis, see11.2.7, Showing network analysis result and ???.

Brightness and contrast for color bitmaps7.5.4.

To define the brightness and contrast of color bitmaps:1. Select Settings > Maps > Outlook.2. Select the value for brightness using the Brightness (%) field and for contrast using

the Contrast (%) field.

Other background map color settings are system-specific and can be changed in DMS600 NE (for more information about system specific settings, see System Administration.

Network and protection analysis settings7.6.

General about network and protection analysis settings7.6.1.

This chapter does not apply to DMS 600 (Base) license. TheNetwork Analysis license is required for a network and pro-tection analysis.

Network and protection analysis settings are system-specific. After the changes in thesettings have been confirmed, they will be used in all DMS 600 NE and DMS 600 WSworkstations.

Network and protection analysis settings can be changed temporarily for each DMS 600WS workstation in the Simulation Mode.

General network analysis settings7.6.2.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license is required for a network andprotection analysis.

49

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 50: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

To define the network analysis settings:1. Select Settings > General.2. Select the Network Analysis tab. Use the scrolling arrows to scroll the tabs if needed.

The tab is unavailable if the Network Analysis license is not included.3. Insert the busbar voltage value in the Default busbar voltage (kV) field. The default

value is 20,5 kV.This field defines the busbar voltage value used in network calculations, if the voltagevalue is not obtained from the MicroSCADA system (for more information aboutMicroSCADA measurements, see 11.2.4, Using of MicroSCADA measurementdata in network analysis).

4. Define the load calculation settings, see 7.6.3, Load calculation settings.5. Insert the value for conductor temperatures.

Conductor temperature in load current calculation defines the operation temper-ature for the line resistance calculation during the load current calculation.Conductor temperature in fault current calculation defines the operation temper-ature for the calculation of the conductor resistance during the network analysis.The value must be between 0 ... + 400oC. The equivalent temperature for the calcu-lation of conductor resistance is defined in the MV conductor data form.

Load calculation settings7.6.3.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license is required for a network andprotection analysis.

The contents of the load calculation settings depend on whether load curves or Velander'sfactors are used (for more information about changing load calculation method, seeInstallation Manual. In the following table, the word in the brackets after the field labelindicates when the setting is visible.

Table 7.6.3-1 Load calculation settingsNotes:Function:Field:

The default value is 1.

This setting can be used espe-cially for simulation purposes.

Defines the factor, by which allloads in the network databaseare multiplied in network calcu-lations.

Constant factor for loads

50

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 51: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Notes:Function:Field:

The default value of the checkbox is NOT selected.

Velander’s factors are usedonly to convert possibly givenenergy values to peak powervalues. Deviation in the loadsis not taken into account. If allloads are given as real power,the loads of line sections aresimply the sum of the loadpoints (plus losses).

Defines if the real power loadsentered for load points areused as such.

Powers as constant power(Velander)

The default value is 0.28.

Used like this if Powers asconstant power check box isNOT selected.

The formula takes into accountthe fact that the given realpowers of the load points arenot likely to occur at the sametime and that there is somedeviation in the loads.

Defines the factor to be usedtogether with annual energiesin an empirical formula to calcu-late the loads.

Velander's factor 1 (Velander)

Used like this if Powers asconstant power check box isselected.

Defines the factor to be usedto convert possibly givenenergy values to peak powervalues.

The default value is 0.08.

Used like this if Powers asconstant power check box isNOT selected.

The formula takes into accountthe fact that the given realpowers of the load points arenot likely to occur at the sametime and that there is somedeviation in the loads.

Defines the factor to be usedtogether with annual energiesin an empirical formula to calcu-late the loads.

Velander's factor 2 (Velander)

Used like this if Powers asconstant power check box isselected.

Defines the factor to be usedto convert possibly givenenergy values to peak powervalues, if all loads are given asenergy values.

Used with the statistical ana-lysis using normal deviation.The default value 1.6 meansthat the used load in somecases is the expected value +1.6*standard deviation.

Defines the certainty factor forstatistical load analysis.

Statistical factor (load curves)

51

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 52: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Notes:Function:Field:

Breaking capacity of the discon-nector is checked when theuser is about to open a controldialog for the disconnector in aclosed state, if the checkswitching actions setting isturned on.

Defines the multiplier for cur-rent based on the load flowcalculation.

Multiplier for checking breakingcapacity of the load current

The correct values for Velander’s factors depend on the typeof customer, that is the type of energy consumption.

Protection analysis settings7.6.4.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license is required for a network andprotection analysis.

To define the protection analysis settings:1. Select Settings > General.2. Select the Protection tab. Use the scrolling arrows to scroll the tabs if needed. The

tab is unavailable if the Network Analysis license is not included.3. Insert the value for earth-fault resistance in the Earth-fault resistance (ohm) field.

The default value is 500 ohm. This defines the earth-fault resistance used in theprotection analysis.

4. Define the selectivity analysis settings.

Table 7.6.4-1 Selectivity analysis settingsNotes:Function:Field:

The default value is 0.30.Defines the accepted timemarginal between the trippingtimes of two serial protectionrelays.

Operating delay for relays (s)

52

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 53: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Notes:Function:Field:

The default value is 0.30.

A value is given as the factorof fuse melting time.

The fuse melting times arebased on the melting time dia-gram. The melting times areaverage values, because thedispersion of melting times isobserved. Fuses are selectiveif their melting times are differ-ent in certain fault current. Forthe fuses of the same manufac-turer, 20% of the longer meltingtime is considered as anadequate time marginal. In anyother case, the correspondingvalue should be bigger, about30%.

Defines the accepted timemarginal between the meltingtimes of the fuses or the melt-ing time of the fuse and relaytripping time.

Operating delay for fuses

Defines the prevention of trip-ping to be taken into accountduring the selectivity analysis.

Relay lockings enabled

The relay of circuit breaker andfuses in relay-fuse protectedlines are usually selective if thehigh-speed initial tripping of therelay clears the transient faults.The fuse, or fuses, operatesduring a delayed tripping periodto isolate persistent faults andto minimize the section of net-work without supply.

Defines the delayed reclosingtime to be used in the selectiv-ity analysis.

Delayed reclosing time is usedin relay-fuse protected lines

5. Define the LV network protection to be analyzed against Fault current/fuse orOperation time based by selecting the appropriate option.

6. If Operation time based analysis is checked, define the maximum operation timefor the fuse.

If you select the Fault current/fuse option, the protection analysis of LV networks isperformed using the percentage ratio between the short-circuit current and the fusenominal current multiplied by 2.5 (if the fuse nominal current is <63 A) or by 3 (if thefuse nominal current is > 63 A).

If you selcet the Operation time based option, the analysis of LV networks is performedusing the ratio between the given maximum operation time for the fuse and the averagemelting time of the fuse with the short-circuit current. The melting times of the LV net-work fuses are based on the LV network fuse melting time diagram.

53

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 54: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Meshed network and protection analysis settings7.6.5.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license is required for a network andprotection analysis.

To define the meshed network and protection analysis settings:1. Select Settings > General.2. Select the Meshed Network Analysis tab. Use the scrolling arrows to scroll the

tabs if needed. The tab is unavailable if the Network Analysis license is not included.3. Define the meshed network and protection analysis settings.

Table 7.6.5-1 Meshed network and protection analysis settingsNotes:Function:Field:

It must correspond to one ofthe voltage levels in the net-work and to the set DefaultBusbar Voltage (kV).

Usually the highest mediumvoltage level.

Defines the nominal voltage fora meshed network analysis.

Base Voltage (kV)

May be changed if there is aproblem for the algorithm toconverge to a solution.

Defines the power used in theload flow algorithms of meshednetwork analysis.

Base Power

Is used to make the load flowcalculation effective in large MVnetworks.

It is recommended to select thisoption.

Defines whether the reductionof radial branches is used inthe load flow calculation ofmeshed network.

Reduction of radial branches

It is recommended to select thisoption.

Defines whether the protectionanalyze is automatically per-formed after the short-circuitcalculation of meshed network.

Protection analyse after SCcalculation of Meshed Network

Fault management settings7.7.

This chapter does not apply to DMS 600 (Base) license. FaultLocation license is required for fault management.

To define the fault location settings:1. Select Settings > General.

54

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 55: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

2. Select the Fault Management tab. Use the scrolling arrows to scroll the tabs ifneeded.

3. Define the Fault management settings.

Table 7.7-1 Fault location settingsFunctionField

After the receipt of a fault to be repaired, resets states in SYS600 database for all remote readable fault detectors along thefaulted feeder. Also DMS 600 WS could be set to ask confirma-tion for this for each detector.

Reset fault detectors

Deactivates all calls inside the faulty area when the fault is setto be repaired.

Confirm: Asks for a confirmation to the previous.

Deactivate Disturbance Calls

DMS 600 SA will check for all faults received from SYS 600 ifthere already is an unrepaired fault at the same feeder. If sucha fault is found a new fault is not generated.

Only one fault per feeder

When a fault is removed from the Fault Management dialog(repaired, removed or archived), DMS 600 WS will automaticallysearch fault files for the new unrepaired faults.

Search for new faults afterreceipt

If a new unrepaired fault is found in any fault file search, DMS600 WS will ask confirmation to locate it.

Confirm to start fault location

Switching data is not stored to fault files of unrepaired faults. Ifthis option is not set, the switchings are read from the switchinglog file when the fault report is opened for the first time.

Save switchings to fault file

This setting will affect dropdown boxes and lists in FaultInformation, New Fault and Fault Management dialogs. Feedernames are generated as:

Selection1/Selection2/Selection3.

Selectable fields are: CB code, CB scadacode, CB name, feedercode and feeder name.

Faulted feeder name

Outage data is refreshed from the database at given intervals.Refresh rate for outage data (s)

If DMS 600 WS is in the simulation mode for a long time,unsupplied customers are read from database.

Refresh rate for unsuppliedcustomers (s)

If the fault duration is longer than the setting value, the icon ofthe fault in the Outage information dialog will change.

Warning limit of the fault dura-tion (h)

55

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 56: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Fault location settings7.8.

General about fault location settings7.8.1.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault location.

Fault location settings are system-specific. After changes in the settings have been con-firmed, the new fault location settings are used in all DMS 600 WS workstations.

Fault location settings can be changed temporarily for each DMS 600 WS workstationin the Simulation Mode.

General fault location settings7.8.2.

Defining fault location settings7.8.2.1.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault location.

To define the fault location settings in the following order:1. Select Settings > Fault Location. The command is unavailable if the Fault Location

license is not included. The dialog box can also be opened for simulation by clickingParameters in the Fault Management dialog box.

2. Define the certainty factor settings. For more information, see 7.8.2.2, Certaintyfactor settings. Certainty factor settings define the usage of rules in fault location.

3. Define the faulted zone location settings. For more information, see 7.8.2.3, Faultedzone location settings. The faulted zone location settings are used in automatic faultisolation and restoration.

4. Define the load current compensation settings. For more information, see7.8.2.4, Load current compensation settings.

5. Define the impedance-based fault distance calculation settings. For more information,see 7.8.2.5, Impedance-based fault location settings.

6. Select the Earth fault tab and define the earth-fault resistance used in earth-faultcurrent based fault location.

7. Click OK to change the system-specific settings or click Simulate to change theparameters only temporarily for the workstation and run the fault location functionagain with the new parameter values. Simulate is available only when the dialogbox is opened via Fault Management.

56

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 57: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Certainty factor settings7.8.2.2.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault location.

Fault location is based on rules, and certainty factors are used during fault location toemphasize individual rules.

Select Settings > Fault Location and select the Certainty factors tab.

Set the certainty factor value (stress) within the range 0...1. A high value increases theimportance of the rule. A value of 0 (zero) means that the rule is not used at all.

Define the certainty factors for the following rules:

Table 7.8.2.2-1 Certainty factorsRecommended Values:Rule to Use in Fault Location:Field:

Recommended value 0.85.Calculated fault distance dataFault Distance

Recommended value 0.6.Fault detector operation dataFault Detector

Recommended value 0.15.Existence of overhead lineOverhead Line

Recommended value 0.3.

Recommended value for limit0.8.

Calculated overloading of cable

Overloading limit for cable

Overloading of Cable

Limit

Recommended value 0.3.

Recommended value for limit0.8.

Calculated overloading oftransformer

Overloading limit for cable

Overloading of Transf.

Limit

Faulted zone location settings7.8.2.3.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault location.

Faulted zone location settings are used in the automatic fault isolation and restorationfunction. For more information about isolation and restoration planning, see12.6.1, General about fault isolation .

Select Settings > Fault Location and select the Faulted Zone Location tab.

Define the faulted zone location settings (within the range 0...1).

57

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 58: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Table 7.8.2.3-1 Faulted zone location settingsFunction:Field:

Defines the lower limit for the probability of the fault in someremote controlled zone to perform the automatic definition ofthe faulted zone for the isolation and restoration.

Faulted zone

Lower limit

Defines the upper limit for the probability of fault in other zonesto perform the automatic definition of the faulted zone for theisolation and restoration.

Other zones

Upper limit

Load current compensation settings7.8.2.4.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault location.

Load current compensation means the elimination of load current in the measured faultcurrent.

Select Settings > Fault Location and select the Load Current Compensation tab.

Table 7.8.2.4-1 Load current compensation settingsNotes:Function:Field:

This method is used as default.The load current just before thefault, measured by the samemeasuring unit which meas-ured the fault current, is subtrac-ted as such from the measuredfault current.

Pure load current

This method takes into accountthe voltage drop during thefault.

Defines the load to be zero, ifthe voltage during the fault isless than the voltage limit.

Voltage dependent

The default value is 0.6.Defines the voltage limit forvoltage-dependent load currentcompensation method.

Voltage limit (0-1)

The default value is 1.5.Defines the dependence of realpower P on voltage U.

Pu (1-2)

The default value is 4.Defines the dependence ofreactive power Q on voltage U.

Qu(2-6)

58

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 59: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Impedance-based fault location settings7.8.2.5.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault location.

Fault distance calculation can be based on reactance between the relay location and thefault location.

Select Settings > Fault Location and select the Impedance based tab.

Table 7.8.2.5-1 Impedance-based fault distance calculation settingsNotes:Function:Field:

For short circuits only the posit-ive sequence reactance (linereactance) is used.

Defines the name of theimpedance-based fault locationmethod. There can be severalmethods in use at the sametime.

Name

Defines the certainty factor forimpedance-based fault dis-tance calculation

Certainty factor

Defines the drawing color offault location arrow for theappropriate method.

Color

Distance-based fault location settings7.8.2.6.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault location.

The fault location calculation can be based on the distance between the IED location andthe fault location.

To define distance-based fault location settings, select Settings > Fault Locations >Distance tab.

Table 7.8.2.6-1 Fault distance dataNotes:Information:Field:

Defines the certainty factor fordistance-based fault distancecalculation.

Certainty factor

59

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 60: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Notes:Information:Field:

Defines the drawing color offault location arrow for the dis-tance-based fault distance cal-culation.

Color

Impedance-based earth fault location settings7.8.2.7.

In neutral (isolated or compensated) networks the earth fault causes very small currents.If a protection relay or other device can provide the measured reactance value betweenthe relay location and the fault location, the locating of the earth fault is also possible inthese networks.

For earth faults the given reactance value includes positivesequence (line) and zero sequence values. The given value isthe sum of those components.

To define earth fault location settings:1. Select Settings > Fault Location and select the Earth fault tab.2. Click New and define the method name that is used in case of earth faults. The

method name must be used for earth faults only so that the method name can beused to select special fault location methods for earth faults in neutral isolated orcompensated networks.

Table 7.8.2.7-1 Earth fault distance calculation settingsNotes:Function:Field:

Method name must be differentfrom those given for impedancebased short circuit location.

Defines the name for earth faultlocation method. There can beseveral methods in use at thesame time.

Name

Defines the certainty factor forearth fault distance calculation

Certainty factor

Defines the drawing color offault location arrow for theappropriate method.

Color

Switching planning settings7.8.3.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license with Operations Planning sub-license is required for switching planning.

60

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 61: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

To define the switching planning settings:1. Select the Settings > General.2. Select the Switching Planning tab. Use the scrolling arrows to scroll the tabs if

needed.3. Define the switching planning settings.

Table 7.8.3-1 Switching planning settingsFunction:Field:

Defines the maximum allowed voltage drop during switchingplanning.

Voltage Drop max (%)

Defines the minimum allowed short-circuit detection percentduring switching planning.

SH Detection min (%)

Defines the minimum allowed earth-fault detection percent duringswitching planning.

Earth-fault detection min (%)

Defines the maximum allowed short-circuit capacity percentduring switching planning.

SC Capacity max (%)

Defines the maximum allowed load level percent during switchingplanning.

Load level max (%)

Defines saving folder for switching planning files.Saving Folder

Defines the multiplier for current based on the load flow calcula-tion.

Multiplier for checking breakingcapacity of the load current

Defines if the calculated load current is used for checking on-load capacity. It is selected by default when starting the auto-matic switching sequence creation.

Use breaking capacity of theload current as default

Click Advanced to modify the data content of the switching plan (for more informationabout data content of the switching plan, see 13.10.1, Plan data.

Reporting settings7.8.4.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Outage Reporting and Statistics license is required forreporting.

To define the outage reporting settings:1. Select the outage to be reported.2. Click Parameters in the Report Management dialog.3. Define the reporting settings.

61

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 62: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Table 7.8.4-1 Reporting settingsNotes:Function:Field:

Used to filter out possiblereclosings or other short dura-tion times.

Minimum duration time ofpowered state for calculation ofoutage ending time.

Powered time minimum

Used to filter out short breakscaused by restoration of normalswitching state after faultrepairing.

Maximum duration time ofunpowered state for calculationof outage ending time.

Unpowered time maximum

Default value is 1 second.Outage duration time for auto-matic creation of fast reclosingtype of outage report.

Fast Reclosing unpowered time

Default value is 120 seconds.Outage duration time for auto-matic creation of delayedreclosing type of outage report.

Delayed reclosing unpoweredtime

Setting up switching state document7.8.5.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Switching state document licenses are required for thecreation of the switching state document. If the Telephoneanswering machine license is used, the real time messages ofoutage areas are included in the document.

To define the static texts for a switching state document:1. Select View > Create switching state document. If the command is used for the

first time, select the folder in which the document will be created. The SwitchingState Document dialog opens. The target folder is shown in the dialog. Click Changefolder, if you want to change the folder.

2. Click Change Static Texts. The Static texts in document dialog opens.3. Insert the document name (for example DistributionState). Both automatically or

manually created documents will use this document name. The default types of thecreated documents are .doc and .htm (for example DistributionState.doc and Distri-butionState.htm).

4. Insert the header text for the document (for example, STATE).5. Insert the interrupt information text. The Interrupt information field contains %d

characters that are replaced with the number of unsupplied MV/LV stations (thefirst appearance) and customers (the second appearance) (for example, "Outages indistribution network affects %d transformers and %d customers." will be replacedwith "Outages in distribution network affects 2 transformers and 8 customers.").

6. Insert the area information text. Area information is created using the text of theAreas field and area definitions from the telephone answering machine database(for more information, see System Administration. An example of area information

62

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 63: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

may be: "Interrupted areas: Vuohijärvi and Mäntyharju to the north from Jaala, inthe area of Siikakoski and Huhdasjärvi".

7. Insert no interrupts information text.8. Click OK. The date and time information will be added automatically to the docu-

ment.

Background map settings7.9.

General about background map settings7.9.1.

The settings for the outlook and storage location of background maps are workstation-specific and can be defined in any DMS 600 software. Map material titles and colorsettings for the background maps (except the brightness and contrast for the coloredbitmaps) are system-specific and can only be changed in DMS 600 NE (for moreinformation about system-specific settings, see System Administration).

Outlook of background maps7.9.2.

To define the workstation-specific outlook of background maps:1. Select Settings > Maps > Outlook.2. Define the outlook settings.

Table 7.9.2-1 Outlook settingsNotes:Function:Field:

If maps are not used, themonochrome background isused. For more informationabout color settings, see Sys-tem Administration.

Defines whether the back-ground maps are shown or noton the screen behind the net-work.

Background map

Caching speeds up mapupdating, but consumesmemory. Each DMS 600 pro-gram reserves its own cache.

Defines whether a cachememory for background mapsis used or not.

Cache

The default maximum size forthe cache is 75% of the freephysical memory at themoment when DMS 600 WS orDMS 600 NE were started forthe first time.

Defines the cache memorysize.

Size (Mb)

The selection changes the viewof both network windows rightaway.

Defines if the boundaries of thewhole network window view aredefined by the adjusted mapmaterial or by the network win-dow.

Range by maps

63

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 64: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Notes:Function:Field:

If not all maps are drawn duringthe time limit; the system can-cels the map drawing and con-tinues by drawing the network.

Defines the number of secondsthat can be used for drawingthe background maps.

Time out [s]

If automatic zooming is notselected, only one map mater-ial can be selected at a time.

Defines if the shown mapmaterial is automaticallychanged based on the zoomlimits of the different materialsand the present zooming area.

Automatic zooming

For the definition of mapmaterial titles, see SystemAdministration.

Define what map materials aredisplayed and what the zoomlimits are for the correspondingmaterials.

Map materials:

material1...material6

Defines the brightness of thecolored bitmaps.

Brightness (%)

Defines the contrast of thecolored bitmaps.

Contrast (%)

Only maps in vector format canbe drawn upon.

Definition of the titles for drawupon map materials, see Sys-tem Administration.

Define what displayable mater-ials can be drawn upon andwhat the zoom limit are for thecorresponding materials.

Draw upon maps:

material1...material3

Defines the map texts to beshown or not, and the zoomlimit for the text presentation.

Vector map texts:

Texts on/off

Zoom (km)

Colors are used to set the colors of the background maps. Only the administrator canchange the color definitions and Colors is only available in DMS 600 NE (for moreinformation about background map color definitions, see System Administration).

Storage location of background maps7.9.3.

All background map material is always located on the fileserver’s hard disk. Backgroundmap material can also be partly located on a local hard disk. Storage location is the MAPdirectory under the working directory.

If the maps are stored on the local workstation, the drawingof the maps on the screen is faster, because a lot of data doesnot need to be read through the computer network. However,local storage increases the need for available hard disk space.

To define the workstation-specific storage location of background map materials:1. Select Settings > Maps > Location.

64

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 65: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

2. Select which map material is to be copied by clicking one of the material1...mater-ial6 check boxes of the map materials or one of the material1...material3 checkboxes of the draw upon map materials. For more information about definition ofthe titles for map and draw upon map materials, see System Administration.

3. Click Give Area and choose the area form the network window with the left mousebutton.

4. Click Transfer to transfer the background maps of a chosen area from the server'shard disk to the local hard disk.

Remove the selected maps from the local hard disk by clicking Remove.

65

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 66: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

General functions8.

Selecting region8.1.

After a successful login, network windows show the medium voltage network. Onlythose regions that the user has rights to view are shown, and also the available operationsdepend on the user rights.

Click View > Regions > "Region name" to change the region in the network windows.

Selecting operational modes8.2.

DMS 600 WS operates in six different modes:

Table 8.2-1 Operational modesCommands and notesFunctioningMode

The base mode

Displays the date and time inthe third pane of the status bar.

If the connection to Micro-SCADA is broken, a blinkingtext "OFFLINE" is displayed inthe third pane of the status bar.

Analyze > Back to StateMonitoring

Operations > Stop Planningor Close button in SwitchingPlan Management dialog.

• Network topology monitor-ing with real time networkdata (also contains pos-sible temporary networks)and switch states

• Viewing of the network andprotection analysis resultsin real time network data

• Fault location in real timenetwork data

• Management of real timeswitch states is normallydone via DMS 600 SA fromMicroSCADA. Can also bemanaged manually duringdisconnection from Micro-SCADA

• Uses MicroSCADA pic-tures

• OPC interface open

State Monitoring Mode

66

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 67: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Commands and notesFunctioningMode

Some functionality is disabledto enhance the performance ofDMS 600 WS in extreme condi-tions (Storm or any other situ-ation when there are severalswitching operations and otherevents in a short period oftime).

More information about dis-abled functionality and settings,see 7.4.1, Defining automaticfunction settings.

Analyze > Disturbance mode

Disturbance mode is alsoindicated in the status bar.

• Automatic fault location isdisabled (same as FaultLocation setting (Worksta-tion))

• Automatic load flow calcu-lation is disabled

• Automatic meshed networkload flow calculation is dis-abled

• Minimum interval betweenscreen updates is set toDisturbance value

Disturbance Mode

• Functions same as in StateMonitoring Mode

• OPC interface closed• Switch states and measure-

ments values are notupdated to DMS 600 WSthrough the OPC interface

• Switch states and measure-ment values that are onlyupdated through the SCILAPI interface are updatedto DMS 600 WS

Offline Mode

Analyze > Simulation

DMS 600 WS is not connectedto process through Micro-SCADA.

A blinking text "Simulation" isdisplayed in the second paneof the status bar. Time is notdisplayed in the third pane ofthe status bar.

• Viewing of the network andprotection analysis resultswith the switches in a simu-lated state, with modifiedrelay data or with modifiedor forecasted load data

• Fault location with simu-lated fault data

• Uses internal station dia-grams instead of Micro-SCADA pictures

• OPC interface disabled

Simulation Mode

Operations > Switching PlanManagement or Operations >Start Switching Planning

A blinking text "Switching Plan-ning" is displayed in the secondpane of the status bar.

• Planning of a switchingsequence during a fault ormaintenance outage

• Uses internal station dia-grams instead of Micro-SCADA pictures

• OPC interface disabled

Switching Planning Mode

67

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 68: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Commands and notesFunctioningMode

Fault > Start Automatic FaultIsolation

The command is visible indefined DMS 600 WS worksta-tion.

• Automatically tries to loc-ate, isolate and restore afault.

• Manual isolation and restor-ation if automatic functioncannot complete the faultclearance

• Uses MicroSCADA pic-tures

Automatic Fault Isolation andRestoration Mode

Operations > Reconfiguration

A blinking text "Optimization" isdisplayed in the second paneof the status bar

• Reconfiguration Planning• OPC interface disabled

Optimization Mode

Controlling voltage levels8.3.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Low Voltage Networks license is required for low voltagenetworks.

Normally the medium voltage network is visible and active in the network windows.Low voltage networks are always separately read to the memory. All functions are aimedto the active voltage level networks.

The reading of low voltage network/networks can be done by selecting:• File > Load LV Networks and selecting the MV/LV substations by defining the

rectangle area from the network window, inside which the low voltage networksare read.

• LV Network in the separate MV/LV substation node dialog.• Load LV Network in the shortcut menu. To open the shortcut menu, right-click

the MV/LV transformer node in the main network window.• LV Network in the dialog that opens after selecting View > Find > Switch/MV/LV

Station.• LV Network in the dialog that opens after selecting View > Customer Information.

When an LV network containing temporary network changesis loaded for the first time, the user has to choose whether thetemporary network changes are loaded or not. The functionthereafter depends on the selected option. For more informa-tion about options, see 8.4.1, Updating network data.

68

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 69: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

When an LV network containing LV switch changes is loadedfor the first time, the user has to choose whether the switchchanges are loaded or not. The function thereafter depends onthe selected option. For more information about options, see9.2.6, Changing LV switch states.

After changing to the low voltage network (low voltage is active), the medium voltagenetwork is dimmed in the network windows. Selecting View > Only LV NetworksVisible fades out the medium voltage network from the network windows. SelectingView > Select Voltage Level enables the selection of the active voltage level betweenmedium and low voltage, when even one low voltage network is read to the memory.

Selecting File > Drop LV Networks from Memory returns the view back to the mediumvoltage network by dropping the low voltage networks from the memory.

Updating network data and normal switching state8.4.

Updating network data8.4.1.

When starting up, DMS 600 WS reads network data from the binary network file of thefileserver. Correspondingly, the temporary network data is read.

When an LV network containing temporary network changes is loaded for the first time,the user has to choose whether temporary network changes are loaded or not. The functionthereafter depends on the selected option:

Table 8.4.1-1 Options during the first loading of LV network containing temporarynetwork changes

Function:Option:

Possible temporary network changes are executed for every LVnetwork to be loaded. No further confirmation is asked.

Yes To All

Possible temporary network changes are not executed for none ofthe LV networks to be loaded. No further confirmation is asked.

No To All

DMS 600 NE can be used to update network data (also temporary network data) whilethe instances of DMS 600 WS are running. DMS 600 NE updates the binary networkfile and the temporary network file in the fileserver according to user input. At the sametime, it also sends a message to all instances of DMS 600 WS about the new networkdata. The binary network file is saved only to the local workstation, if the updating ofDMS 600 WS is prohibited.

Update new network data to DMS 600 WS for immediate use by accepting the suggestionin the message window or later by clicking File > Refresh Network Data.

69

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 70: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

The administrator of the system can define the scheduled update of the binary networkfile to ensure that the last network changes are available to all workstations. If DMS 600NE is in logon state during a scheduled update, a message is displayed and the user canprevent the update by clicking Stop or pressing ESC within 10 seconds.

Updating normal switching state8.4.2.

When starting up, DMS 600 WS reads the real time status of the medium voltage switches(from the DMS 600 database) obtained from MicroSCADA via DMS 600 SA. If theconnection to MicroSCADA is not in use, a message is displayed and the last statusesof the switches are read from the DMS 600 database. The switching state is used topresent the distribution network topology.

During start up, DMS 600 WS reads also the saved normal switching state data from thefile. Select View > Show > Abnormal Switching States to view the medium voltageswitches, which are in different state, using the defined symbol.

Select File > Save as Normal State to update the existing medium voltage networkswitching state to the user-defined normal switching state file. At the same time, a messageabout the new data is sent to all instances of DMS 600 WS. New switching state data isautomatically updated immediately.

The user-defined normal LV network switching state file is created in DMS 600 NE.

The normal switching state also defines the normal region for the region and user man-agement (for more information about normal regions, see 4.4, Regions).

Locating network components8.5.

To locate a network component, select:• View > Find > Switch/MV/LV Station and select the object from the list. By

selecting "Mark", the code and label of the selected object are shown in a white boxnear the object. By selecting "Locate", the object is located using the default locationmark. The list can be sorted according to codes or labels. The sorting order is savedwhen quitting the program. Several objects can be viewed simultaneously. The boxescan be removed from the network window with View > Find > Clear.

• Locate function in the free data form. The function locates the active networkcomponent/object and shows it with the defined location symbol in the networkwindow.

Remove location symbols by selecting View > Database Queries > Clear Results inNetwork Window after closing of the free data form.

For more information about location of a customer, see 8.16, Finding customer inform-ation.

70

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 71: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

The locating function for SYS 600 network components opens DMS 600 WS and showsthe selected network component in the network window. Right-click a process object(circuit breaker, disconnector, line indicator, contactor or load breaker) in SYS 600 andselect Locate object from the popup menu.

Showing node information8.6.

You can open the dialog box of a node or a feeding line section in two ways:

• Select the node by clicking it with the mouse in the network window, network dia-gram or internal station diagram.

OR:

• Right-click a node or line section in the main network. Then click Node Informationin the opened shortcut menu.

When a node in a line section is selected, the network node and feeding line section arehighlighted in the network window.

The content of the dialog box depends on the end node of the line section. The basic dataof the line section and the possible end node, together with some network and protectionanalysis results, is shown in the dialog box. The highlighted node of the two end nodesof the line section is the one where the voltage level is lower than in the other end. Thismust be taken into account when reading network and protection analysis results fromthe dialog. Flowing current is always positive since the direction is towards a lowervoltage level. However, active or reactive power may be negative, for example, if thelines are overcompensated.

Showing network component data8.7.

Free data forms8.7.1.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Extended Data Management license is required for freedata forms.

DMS 600 WS uses only free data forms for the browsing of network components andfree database object data. Free data forms are views into the DMS 600 network database.Several free data forms can be opened simultaneously.

71

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 72: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Free data forms are also used to present measurements, documents and field crews (formore information about measurements and field crews, see 6.4.9, Showing free databaseobjects, texts and measurements and 8.20.3, Modifying field crew data).

Opening free data forms8.7.2.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Extended Data Management license is required for freedata forms.

There are three ways to open the free data forms:1. Click File > Objects and select the object type.2. Choose a node or line section in the network window, the network diagram or station

diagram, or click Node Information in the shortcut menu that opens when right-clicking the node in the main network window. Then click Data Form. If you choosea site node, click Data Form, and the first network component of the chosen sitenode is shown in the free data form.

3. Click Data Form in the shortcut menu that opens when right-clicking a node or linesection in the main network window. The free data form of the node or the end nodeof the chosen line section opens.

The free data forms are sorted by their network component codes. Point the section ofthe network to show the free data form of a selected node/line section.

Browsing free data forms8.7.3.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Extended Data Management license is required for freedata forms.

The arrow buttons in the bottom of the free data form are used to change the record:

Table 8.7.3-1 Arrow buttons in the bottom of the free data formFunction:Button:

Moves to the first record.

Moves to the previous record.

Moves to the next record.

Moves to the last record.

72

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 73: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Content of free data forms8.7.4.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Extended Data Management license is required for freedata forms.

Free data forms consist of boxes and buttons which are used to insert and update networkcomponent data. The administrator of the system can define the contents of the forms.

The bottom of the free data forms contains the Close button which closes the active freedata form. Help opens the help for the active window.

The user can revise the free data form using the layout functions. Settings is used todefine the fields that are displayed and the order of fields. The free data form changesaccording to the new definitions immediately after the dialog box is closed.

The location of the table can be changed with the mouse. The location and layout of thefree data form are saved for each network component or object type when closing thefree data form.

Management of MV/LV substation texts8.8.

Texts describing the changes in low voltage networks are inserted into the MV/LV sub-stations in DMS600 NE or in DMS600 WS. Texts inserted to the MV/LV transformerare shown with special background symbols for MV/LV substations.

To insert the LV text into a MV/LV transformer:1. Right-click the MV/LV transformer. You do not have to load the LV network into

memory.2. Select MV/LV Substation Text in the shortcut menu.

If some text for the chosen MV/LV transformer exists in database, it is displayedin the dialog.

3. Type in free text describing the LV network (max 255 characters).

Select View > Show > MV/LV Substation Texts to display the LV texts with specialsymbols in the main network window. (For more information about symbol definitions,see System Administration).

LV texts cannot be used in Simulation Mode.

73

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 74: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Browsing the attached documents8.9.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Extended Data Management license is required for thedocument archive.

The documents are data files (for example pictures or text documents) which are attachedto the nodes of the network database. The documents attached to network nodes can bebrowsed in DMS 600 WS.

There are three ways of opening an attached document:• Select File > Documents > Components, which opens the free data form of docu-

ments and click Documents button.• Select the node or line section and click Documents in the dialog.• Right-click the node or line section in the network window and select Documents

from the shortcut menu.• Open the free data form of the network component and click Documents.

The Documents button is unavailable if no documents are attached.

If more than one document is attached to the node, the table containing data of attacheddocuments is opened. The document can be opened by choosing it and selecting Selectin the shortcut menu (or by double-clicking the document).

Click Show or double-click the picture to open the document into the separate window.

Click Open to open the document in the software which is registered to the file type ofthe document (for example, .doc file type opens the document in MS Word). A returnis made with the Esc key.

File > Documents > Attached Files opens the standard file-opening dialog box forfinding the attachment file. The selected file opens in the software with the registeredfile types.

Browsing the archives8.10.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Extended Data Management license is required for thedocument archive.

Archives contain fault, maintenance, reclosing and LV network outage report data.

74

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 75: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

To browse the archive:1. Select the desired archive by selecting Fault > Archives > Fault Archives, Fault

> Archives > LV Network Outage Archives, Fault > Archives > Reclosing orFault > Archives > Maintenance Outage Archives.

2. Select the archive from the list. The outages of the selected archive are listed in theList of Faults or List of Reports dialog.

3. Click Remove to remove the selected outage from the archive. Click Move to movethe selected outage to another archive. The archived fault has the same functionalityin the Fault Management dialog as an unarchived fault (for more information aboutfunctions in the dialog, see 12.7.1, Selection of active fault). However, saving anychanges for any type of the outage report is not possible. For maintenance outages,only viewing of the report is possible.

Displaying MV feeder information8.11.

Open the MV feeder information dialog by selecting Feeder Information from theshortcut menu. You can open the shortcut menu by right-clicking a node or line section.

The dialog contains the name of the feeder, the name of circuit breaker for the feeder,the total length of the feeder, an amount of transformers in the feeder, the calculatedtotal load, the region and the primary transformer name. If the Network Analysis licenseis not included, the load information is not shown.

Selecting SYS 600 MV feeder information shows the feeder information dialog for theselected feeder. Right-click a process object (circuit breaker or line indicator) in SYS600 station graphic and select Feeder information from the popup menu.

Showing important MV/LV stations transformers8.12.

DMS 600 software enables the classification of MV/LV transformers against theirimportance.

To define the visibility of important MV/LV transformers:1. Select View > Show > Important MV/LV Stations.2. Insert the limits for importance rates. The important MV/LV stations are not shown

if both importance rate boxes are defined to be VOID.

The MV/LV transformers with the selected importance rate are shown with a definedsymbol in the network window.

75

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 76: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Alarms, warnings, notices and events8.13.

General about alarms, warnings, notices and events8.13.1.

Alarms and warnings are generated in DMS 600 WS based on network topology, networkand protection analysis and fault location. The presentation of MicroSCADA alarms andwarnings is in use if the General Extensions license with the Alarms Presentation subli-cense is in use, and the functionality has been selected.

DMS 600 WS alarms and warnings are presented using colors in the network windowsand inserting text to notices and an event list. MicroSCADA alarms and warnings arepresented with user-defined symbols in network windows and changes in object alarmstates presented by inserting text to an event list.

Events are presented using the event list. The contents of the event list is stored to per-manent log files. Earlier events can be reloaded in DMS 600 WS. Notices are not stored.

MicroSCADA alarms8.13.2.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The General Extensions license with the Alarms Presentationsublicense is required for MicroSCADA alarms.

The alarms of the following object types are transferred from MicroSCADA to DMS600 WS:• Disconnector• Primary substation• Circuit breaker• Measurement• Fault detector.

The following table shows the MicroSDACA alarm types in the order of criticality(starting from the most critical):

Table 8.13.2-1 Alarm types in criticality orderMeaningAlarm Type

The value of the object is currently alarming andthe alarm information has not been acknow-ledged. Blinking can be defined.

Alarm active - unacknowledged

The value of the object has returned to notalarming, but the alarm information has not beenacknowledged. Blinking can be defined.

Alarm not active - unacknowledged

76

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 77: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

MeaningAlarm Type

The value of the object is currently alarming andthe alarm information has been acknowledged.

Alarm active - acknowledged

The value of the object is currently warning. Thisalarm type in DMS 600 WS contains both thelow and high warnings of MicroSCADA.

Warning

The value of the object is not warning or alarm-ing.

No alarm or warning

It is possible to define symbols for the first four alarm/warning types in the table. Formore information about symbol definition, see System Administration.

If the primary substation is drawn using a substation symbol, the alarm symbol commonfor all substation components is used. If the substation has several objects having alarmsor warnings, the alarm symbol for the whole substation is the most critical and it usesthe criticality order.

Unacknowledged alarming primary substations, circuit breakers, disconnectors, faultdetectors and measurements can blink in defined colors. The symbol is the same that isused for an unalarming object, for example, the symbol used for an open circuit breakerin the current zoom level. The symbol is blinking switching between the defined blinkingalarm color and the normal symbol color. The interval for the color switching is 1 second.Blinking can also be disabled from all workstations, for more information about setting,see System Administration.

MicroSCADA alarms are also visible in DMS 600's events list, which means that theyare stored into a permanent log.

Showing alarms and warnings in network windows8.13.3.

In the network topology presentation the unsupplied lines, lines in looped connections,and earthed or uncertain lines are presented with separate colors. For more informationabout the settings for topology alarming, see System Administration.

Warning level and alarm level colors are used to present the network and protectionanalysis results when the calculated values exceed the corresponding settings for thelimits. The way the calculation results are presented depends on the network coloringlimits (for more information about network coloring limits, see 7.5.3, Settings of coloringlimits for network and protection analysis).

Double-click an alarm or warning in the notices list to locate the alarmed network areawith the warning color, or an alarmed node with the location mark in the main networkwindow. For more information about the Notices list, see 8.13.4.1, Contents of the noticeslist.

77

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 78: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Showing notices in notices list8.13.4.

Contents of the notices list8.13.4.1.

Select Window > Notices and Events and click the Notices tab to open the list whichcontains the alarms and warnings of DMS 600 WS and MicroSCADA.

The Notices list contains the following DMS 600 information:

Table 8.13.4.1-1 Contents of Notices listNoteBaseAlarm or warning

Generated during startup andafter clicking Help > Aboutcommand.

SoftwareLicense information

Generated during softwarefunctions.

SoftwareFile not found

Topology monitoringEarthed lines

Topology monitoringCold lines

Alarming defined by the sys-tem-specific settings.

Topology monitoringLooped connections

Topology monitoringUncertain lines

Alarming defined by the sys-tem-specific setting.

Topology monitoringUnsupplied MV/LV trans-formers

Alarming and warning limitsdefined by the system-specificsettings.

Network analysisVoltage drops

Alarming and warning limitsdefined by the system-specificsettings.

Network analysisDetection ability of short-circuitprotection in medium voltagenetworks and fault current/fusevalue in low voltage networks

DMS 600 SAMicroSCADA connection isok/broken

OPC ServerOPC connection information

Alarming and warning limitsdefined by the system-specificsettings.

Network analysis3-phase short-circuit capacityin medium voltage networksand detection of short-circuitprotection in low voltage net-works

78

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 79: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Working with events lists8.13.5.

Showing events in events list8.13.5.1.

To display the events list:1. Select Window > Notices and Events and click the Events tab to open the list

containing the events.2. Define the period for the event search using the fields and buttons in the top of the

dialog:

Table 8.13.5.1-1 Fields and buttons in the top of Events dialogNotes:Function:Field or button:

All defines all weeks of allyears.

Defines the year for the eventsThe first field

All defines all weeks of thedefined year.

Defines the week for the eventsThe second field

Defines the previous week tobe loaded.

<

Defines the next week to beloaded.

>

The default at start up.Defines the last two weeks tobe loaded.

>|

3. Select the event list column (Operation, Device, Username or Normal Region)to be filtered by including the events containing the defined string. To filter byexcluding the events that contain the defined string select Operation, Device,Username or Normal Region.

4. Exclude all SCADA events by checking the Exclude SCADA Events check box(for more information about SCADA event settings, see System Administration).

5. Click Filter to define the text for the filtering or just refresh the event list of theselected period using selected filter.

6. The maximum number of events is shown in the event list. Check Ask to exceedevent limit check box if the confirmation about event limit exceeding will be askedwhen necessary (for more information about setting the number of events, see SystemAdministration).

To edit the time stamp of a switching or alarm event:1. Right click the event from the list, and select Edit time from the pop up menu.2. Edit the time label of the event. An asterisk (*) will be shown at the end of the event.3. Click Save to save the changes to the time label to a separate log file (Changed.tmp).4. Check the Show only Time Stamp Changes check box. The list will display only

those events whose time stapms have been changed.5. Click Save to save the time label changes permanently to the chosen week's event

log.

79

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 80: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

It is not possible to permanently save changes to the eventsof the current week.

Click the column header to sort the events according to the column data. Drag the columnheader into a new position in the event list dialog or set the width of the columns bydragging the border of the column.

The filter string selected and edited last is also valid when viewing the previous, thenext, or a freely selected week (or all weeks) in the events list.

Contents of the event list8.13.5.2.

The events list contains the following DMS 600 events:

Table 8.13.5.2-1 Contents of the Event listSourceEvent

DMS 600 WS or SCADASwitching state changes

DMS 600 WSLine open / line close

DMS 600 WSGroundings

DMS 600 WSOpen Scada picture

DMS 600 NE or DMS 600 WSLogin / logout

DMS 600 WS or SCADAAlarm

* Alarm active - unacknowledged

* Alarm not active - unacknowledged

* Alarm active - acknowledged

* Warning

* Alarm unsuitable

* No alarm or warning

DMS 600 WSFault:

* New fault

* Fault responsibility

* Fault restored

* Fault repaired

* Fault report

80

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 81: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

SourceEvent

DMS 600 WS or SCADAAutomatic Fault Isolation and Restoration modechanges:

* Enabled

* Interrupted

* Resetted

* Exited

* Automatic Fault Restoration Failed

* No sequence created for fault isolation

Simulation of historical events8.14.

General about historical events8.14.1.

Any switch state change event can be found from the saved event history log files. Withthe step-by-step proceeding list of state change events you can analyze the situationbefore and after a historical event. A topology analysis and load flow and fault currentcalculations are performed, and the results are shown on the screen after each step. Loadmodels for the selected time are used in a network analysis if the load curves are in use.The simulation can be used for training purposes with real situations.

Step-by-step simulation contains the switch state changes of:• Disconnectors• Circuit breakers• MV fuses• Line sections.

The possible events for the devices are Open, Close and Uncertain. Other devices areskipped in simulation and LV switching actions are not included.

Alarm states of the devices are updated during the step-by-step simulation according tothe alarm information and saved into the event list.

Significant uncertainty occurs when using event log files cre-ated with Open++ Opera version 3.3, because the normalswitching state file must be used as a starting point in thehistorical simulation of those weeks (the normal switchingstate of medium voltage network is saved to the file byselecting File > Save as normal switching state). Some extrauncertainty occurs because the normal switching state file

81

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 82: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

does not contain, for example, line close and line open eventsand alarm states.

Simulating historical events8.14.2.

To simulate historical events:1. Select Window > Notices and Events command and the Events tab to open the

list containing the events.2. Select the week using the second field and click Simulation (the Simulation button

changes to the Stop button). Switching state file of the chosen week is read into thememory. Load models for the selected time are also used if the load curves are used.DMS 600 WS switches to Simulation Mode.

3. Click Step forward and Step backward to change switching state one item forwardor backward (that is, undo the last executed switching action). After the last item inthe list, the program prompts you to read the switching actions and the switchingstate file of the following or previous week.

4. Click switch action in the list item to change the switching state to correspond tothe moment when this switch action was executed.

5. Double-click the action in the list to locate the item and change the switching stateto correspond to the moment when this switch action was executed.

6. Click or double-click a switch action in the list before the current item to simulatethe switching state step-by-step from the beginning of the week until the selecteditem is reached.

7. Click or double-click a switch action in the list after the current item to simulate theswitching state step-by-step from the present switch action until the selected itemis reached.

8. Click Rewind to move to the beginning of the present week.9. Click Stop. The Simulation Mode ends and DMS 600 WS switches back to State

Monitoring Mode.

Opening MicroSCADA pictures8.15.

DMS 600 WS can use also other MicroSCADA pictures than the control and stationpictures. Such MicroSCADA pictures can be, for example, lists of alarms or events.

Select File > Scada Pictures to open a dialog box for selecting the defined MicroSCADApicture to be opened.

Define (from right to left) a display that will be used for opening MicroSCADA monitorif the computer is connected to several displays. If the display number is 0, the monitorof MicroSCADA opens to the same display as DMS 600 WS.

82

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 83: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Finding customer information8.16.

DMS 600 software contains the customer service function. To search the customerinformation:1. Select View > Customer Information. This opens the Customer search dialog.2. Define the base of the search in the Searching instruction field. The search can be

based on customer name, customer node, or any other customer information in thedatabase. The last search base is saved as a default for this workstation.

3. Define the search criteria with the field beside the Search button.4. Start the search by clicking Search. The found customers are listed in the dialog.

The number of found customers is shown in the dialog.

The size and the location of the window can be changed. The state of the window (sizeand location) is saved when the dialog is closed.

Workstation specific setting to the content of the dialog can be changed by clickingSettings. The fields and their order can be changed. By selecting Use only selecteditems as searching instruction the content of the Searching instruction list is narroweddown to those fields selected to be shown in the search results.

The search results can be sorted by clicking the lists header field. Search results can beprinted by selecting Print from the shortcut menu.

Click Locate to locate the selected customer's MV/LV substation or MV customer node,and to show it with the location symbol. If the MV/LV substation is outside the currentview, the zoom area will be moved and the MV/LV substation will be centered usingthe current zoom level. Selecting Clear location symbols clears the symbols from thenetwork window.

The customers of a specified MV/LV substation can be easily found by selecting Cus-tomer search from the popup menu that can be opened by right-clicking the MV/LVsubstation. The Customer search dialog opens and shows all customers of the appropriateMV/LV substation or MV customer node.

Sending GSM messages8.17.

Sending maintenance outage information using GSM message8.17.1.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The GSM Messages sublicense is required for GSM messages.

DMS 600 WS has a function to send GSM messages about an outage to important cus-tomers automatically after a fault or manually in any outage situations (for more

83

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 84: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

information about the automatic GSM message sending in fault cases, see 7.4.2, AutomaticGSM message settings in fault cases).

To send the maintenance outage information GSM message manually:1. Click SMS Messages/Answering Machine in the Switching Plan Management

dialog. The SMS messages dialog opens. The default values are based on the activemaintenance outage plan with planned start and end times. The default GSM messageis focused on customers without supply during the planned maintenance outage.The list of feeders and LV networks without supply are presented in the dialog.

2. Add or remove the feeders, LV networks or customers, to which the GSM messagewill be sent. Select first Selected Feeders, Selected LV networks or SelectedCustomers. Select Add or Remove and point the target from the network window.The customers can also be added to the list clicking Send SMS message in theCustomer Search dialog.

3. Define also if the GSM message is sent to all customers of the selected feeders orLV networks or just to important customers.

4. Select the text to the Area field.5. The formulated GSM message is presented in the bottom of the dialog. The GSM

message is formulated in the following way (the constant parts are presented withcursive):"Maintenance outage at + text of the Area field starting: dd:mm:yyyy hh:mm.Distribution will be back dd:mm:yyyy hh:mm."An example:"Maintenance outage at north of Hometown starting: 7.7.2003 22:00. Distributionwill be back 8.7.2003 7:00."

6. Click Send to send the GSM message.

Sending free form GSM message8.17.2.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The GSM Messages sublicense is required for GSM messages.

To send a free form GSM message to customers:1. Select Fault > SMS Messages or click Send SMS message in the Customer Search

dialog.2. Click Free Text.3. Select the focus for the GSM message. Add or remove the feeders, LV networks or

customers, to which the GSM message will be sent. Click first Selected Feeders,Selected LV networks or Selected Customers button. Click Add or Remove buttonand point the target from the network window. The customers can also be added tothe list by clicking Send SMS message in the Customer Search dialog.

4. Define also if the GSM message is send to all customers of the selected feeders orLV networks or just to important customers.

84

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 85: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

5. Type the message in the text field.6. Click Send to send the GSM message.

Browsing the sent GSM messages8.17.3.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The GSM Messages sublicense is required for GSM messages.

Information about the sent GSM messages is saved into the DMS 600 database.

To browse the information of sent GSM messages:• Select Fault > SMS Message History or click History in the SMS Messages dialog.

The list of all sent GSM messages is shown in the opened dialog. The SMS MessageHistory button in the Customer Search dialog lists all messages sent to the definedcustomer.

• Click Get customers to find all customers to whom the selected message has beensent. Click Filter and define the customer for filtering of the messages. You canalso use the * delimiter in the filtering.

Sending new GSM message to same customer group8.17.4.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The GSM Messages sublicense is required for GSM messages.

To send a new GSM message to the same customer group:1. Select Fault > SMS Message History or click History in the SMS Messages dialog.

The list of all sent GSM messages is shown in the opened dialog. The SMS MessageHistory button in the Customer Search dialog lists all messages sent to the definedcustomer.

2. Select a GSM message that has been sent to the customers you want to send a newGSM message.

3. Click Copy Customers. The customers of the selected GSM message are copiedto the SMS messages dialog. Click Copy Message to copy the whole message tothe dialog.

4. Insert or edit the needed information into the message.5. Click Send.

85

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 86: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Defining telephone answering machine8.18.

General about telephone answering machine8.18.1.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The telephone answering machine sublicense is required fortelephone answering machine functions.

DMS 600 WS has a function to control an automatic telephone answering machine forinforming a calling customer about maintenance and fault outages (for more informationabout automatic telephone answering machine messages in fault cases, see 7.4.3, Auto-matic telephone answering machine using in fault cases).

Defining of telephone answering machine functioning8.18.2.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The telephone answering machine sublicense is required fortelephone answering machine functions.

To define the telephone answering machine functioning:1. Select Fault > Messages. The Automatic customer messages dialog opens. Current

messages are shown in the Current messages window.2. Check the Automatic messages check box to use the automatic telephone answering

machine in customer calls. If the check box is unchecked, the customer call will beconnected to the control center.

3. Click Reserved and define time in minutes to the field after the button to define thecontrol center phone into reserved state for the defined time.

4. Use the drop-down list of Phone number to connect to select the location or personto whom the customer call will be connected after the customer has listened to themessages (for more information about definition of persons, see System Adminis-tration. For example, in the day time "Telephone exchange" and in the night time"Control center" can be selected. Click Number to show the phone number of theselected location or person.

The Current messages window shows all active messages. Select the message from thelist to show the situation of the fault clearance, the estimation of repairing time, thescadacode of the message, the fault connected to the scadacode and the message in textform.

86

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 87: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Creating new telephone answering machine message8.18.3.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The telephone answering machine sublicense is required fortelephone answering machine functions.

To define a new telephone answering machine message:1. Select Fault > Messages and click New. An alternative way to create a new message

is to click Answering Machine in the Fault Management dialog. The New messagedialog opens (if the existing message for opened circuit breaker scadacode is notfound).

2. Select the feeder using the drop-down list. If needed, filter the feeders in the drop-down list using the Group field and the Filter button (grouping against primarysubstation number as a default, for more information about group definition, seeSystem Administration). The scadacode of the circuit breaker and the messageconnected to this scadacode are shown in text form.

3. Click Sub Areas to add the defined subarea messages of the selected feeder and Allareas to take only the feeder message (for more information about sub area definition,see System Administration).

4. As a default, the repair time is empty and the message "Repairing has been started.More information about duration will be available later on." is generated. Definethe estimation about the needed repairing time. Select today or tomorrow and insertthe time in the form hh:mm.

5. Click OK. The message will be in the form "Distribution will be back today about12:50."

Editing telephone answering machine message8.18.4.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The telephone answering machine sublicense is required fortelephone answering machine functions.

To edit a telephone answering machine message:1. Select Fault > Messages. The Automatic customer messages dialog opens. Select

the current message from Current messages window and click Edit. An alternativeway to open the existing message is to click Answering Machine in the FaultManagement dialog. The New message dialog opens containing data about thefeeder, circuit breaker scadacode, and fault connected to the scadacode and themessage in text form.

2. Define the estimation about the needed repairing time. Select "today" or "tomorrow"and insert the time in the form hh:mm.

87

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 88: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

3. Click Sub Areas to add the defined sub area messages of the feeder and All areasto take only the feeder message (for more information about sub area definition, seeSystem Administration.

4. Click OK. The message will be in the form "Distribution will be back today about12:50.".

Removing telephone answering machine message8.18.5.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The telephone answering machine sublicense is required fortelephone answering machine functions.

To remove a telephone answering machine message:1. Click Fault > Messages. The Automatic customer messages dialog opens. Select

the current message from the Current messages window.2. Click Delete.

If Automatic message generation has been selected, DMS600 WS automatically removes the message when the appro-priate fault has been quitted repaired using the Fault Manage-ment dialog.

Creating switching state document8.19.

Creating switching state document8.19.1.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Switching state document licenses are required for thecreation of a switching state document. If the Telephoneanswering machine license is used, the real time messages ofoutage areas are included in the document.

A switching state document is a colored graphical representation of the whole distributionnetwork above the geographical background map. The document contains informationabout unsupplied MV/LV stations. The file formats are .doc and .htm. The documentcan be used, for example, in intranet or Internet to inform about the real time switchingstate of the company.

88

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 89: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

To create a real time switching state document:1. Select View > Create switching state document. If the command is used for the

first time, select the folder where the document will be created. The Switching StateDocument dialog opens. The selected target folder is shown in the dialog.

2. Select the whole distribution network or the current zoom window to be inserted tothe switching state document.

3. Click OK to create the document.

If the target folder needs to be changed, click Change folder and define the new folder.

If the static texts of switching state documents need to be changed, click Change statictexts (for more information, see 7.8.5, Setting up switching state document).

A switching state document can also be generated automatically (for more informationabout automatic generation of document, see System Administration).

The document is created using MS Word. The program hasto be installed in the workstation. The supported MS Wordversions are 97, 2000 and 2002.

Inserting the value for additional load and border switch8.19.2.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Extended Data Management license is required for thedefinition of additional load and border switch. The additionalload points and border switches have to be defined as separateload points in DMS 600 NE before they can be used in DMS600 WS.

Separate load points connected to any node in the medium voltage network can be usedin network calculations. The separate load points are taken into account during the networkcalculation by adding the active power of the measurement to the active power of thenode.

Separate load points connected to a disconnector, which is the ending point of a branchcan be used to model additional loads or a supply from a neighboring network that isnot included in the network database. If the state of the disconnector is 'closed' and thevalue of the measurement is negative (<0), the switch node supplies electricity to thenetwork. The branch becomes energized or a loop connection is formed if the electricitysupply to the switch is also coming from another direction. The discovery of loop con-nection is presented with a different color in the network window. If the supply is comingonly from the switch, the network supplied by this switch is colored with its own colorin the network window.

89

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 90: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

If the state of this switch is 'open', the switch is handled normally in the topology monit-oring and calculations. If the positive active power measurement is inserted to the switch,the amount of active power is added to the power of the node.

Select the manually updateable measurement node by clicking it. Update data into theValue box of the free data form and click Save.

Field crew management8.20.

Overview of field crew management8.20.1.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The General Extensions license is required for field crewmanagement.

The control of manually operated switches and the repairing of fault needs the attendanceof a field crew in the terrain. The efficient organization of field crew movements speedsup fault clearance by cutting the time needed for the disconnection and reparation of afault.

In the Field Crew Management dialog, workgroups, persons, and phones can be added,modified, and deleted.

To open the Field Crew Management dialog, select File > Field Crew Managementin DMS 600 Workstation.

The dialog includes the following functions:

• The tree view on the left includes the static root items for workgroups, persons, andphones.

• The Information tab shows the data of the selected items.• Help opens online help for Field Crew Management.• Show Location locates the selected workgroup on the map.• New Location gives a new position for the selected workgroup by pointing the map.

If one of the devices assigned to the workgroup is marked to be automatically locat-able, the user is warned about it.

• OK closes the Field Crew Management dialog.• Save saves the changes made to the selected item's data. It also updates the visible

information to the tree control.• Cancel reverts changes made to the selected item's data and restores the values.

When one of the root items (Workgroups, Persons, or Phones) is selected from the treeview, the Free Data editor for the selected type is shown on the right side of the dialog.

90

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 91: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Table 8.20.1-1 Field Crew Management dialog symbolsDescriptionSymbol

Workgroups group

Single workgroup

Persons group

Single person

Phones group

Single phone

Person attached to a workgroup

Phone attached to a person or a workgroup

Adding, deleting, and modifying field crew data8.20.2.

To add a new field crew:1. Select File > Field Crew Management.2. The Field Crew Management dialog opens.3. Right-click Workgroups / Persons / Phones, and select Add New.

The Information tab is updated with fields to be filled in.4. Click the Value column of the Name information and enter the name.5. Click Save.6. To define a location for the field crew data, click New Location.

The view changes to the network view.7. Define the location for the field crew data by clicking the desired location in the

network view.8. The X and Y coordinates in the Information tab are updated with the location

information.9. To save all changes, click Save.10. To see the location in the network window, click Show Location.11. The location is shown in the network window as a large X mark.

91

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 92: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

FieldCrewLocation.PNG

Figure 8.20.2-1 Location on the map

12. Click Save. Close the dialog by clicking OK.

Modifying field crew data8.20.3.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The General Extensions license is required for the field crewmanagement.

On the root level, that is, in the Workgroups, Persons, and Phones tree view, the onlymenu option by right-clicking the item is Add New. Tree items can also be deleted bypressing Delete on the keyboard. All delete actions are confirmed before execution.

You can drag and drop the existing assignable items to assign them to other items.

The following assignment rules apply in assigning items:

• A workgroup cannot be assigned to any other item• A person can be assigned to a workgroup (a person assigned to a workgroup is

indicated with a icon in the dialog)• A phone can be assigned to a workgroup or to a person (a phone assigned to a

workgroup or a person is indicated with a icon in the dialog)

All the main actions in the Field Crew Management dialog are accessible throughcontext menus:

• Delete: Deletes the item from the tree and removes it from the database. If theselected item is assigned to some other item, also the assigned item is deleted. If theitem is deleted from an item, which it is assigned to, the item is deleted from thislocation.

• Remove: Removes the item. This action does not delete any data from the database.• Find: If the selected item is assigned to another item, this action locates and selects

the item.

92

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 93: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

• Copy: Person and phone items, which are not assigned to another item, can becopied. This is an alternative way compared to dragging and dropping.

• Paste: If there is an item copied to the memory, the Paste action completes theassignment.

Showing field crews8.20.4.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The General Extensions license is required for the field crewmanagement.

You can view the field crews in the network view.

1. Select View > Show > Field Crew in the DMS 600 WS.2. The location of all defined field crews with the defined symbol in the network view

is shown.3. Move the cursor on top of the lorry symbol to view the information of the field crew.

ShowingFieldCrew.PNG

Figure 8.20.4-1 Showing field crew symbol and information on the map

4. To open the Field Crew Management dialog, click the field crew symbol on themap.

Adding own features to menu8.21.

Own feature commands can be added to DMS 600 File > User Defined Features menu.The menu can contain ten feature commands at a time. The selection of features fromthe menu makes it simple to perform various tasks by starting external programs, forexample, MS Excel or MS Access reports can be opened directly from the menu.

To add a feature command to the menu:1. Select File > User Defined Features > Add. The command changes to File > User

Defined Features > Add New/Remove after the definition of the first featurecommand.

93

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 94: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

2. Define the location of the new feature. Insert the command prompt to the field orfind the feature using the Browse button. The feature can be, for example, anInternet address.

3. Test the feature command by clicking Test.4. Click Add to menu.5. Insert a name for the menu command. The maximum number of characters for a

name is 32. The feature command is shown in the Current user menu box.

To remove a feature command, select the feature and click Remove Row. To changethe name or a feature, double-click the feature command, or select the feature commandand click Settings. Insert the new name or command prompt for the menu command.

If the file type of the defined feature is unknown, the Open with dialog is opened duringthe test phase for registering the file type to software.

Notes and findings8.22.

General about notes and findings8.22.1.

Notes and findings are labels containing short texts. They can be attached somewherein the network window. They can be used to maintain any kind of important informationfor operational personnel, for example, detailed information about a fault. Notes andfindings are automatically updated to all DMS 600 WS workstations.

Notes management8.22.2.

To add a new note in the network:1. Select View > Notes > New.2. Insert the note text into the dialog.3. Click Location and then click the desired place in the network window to locate

the note.4. Click Join and then click the desired network node in the network window to join

the note and the network.5. Click Ok to save and close the note. Click the note with the left mouse button to

open it. Click Del to delete the note. Click Cancel to close the note without saving.

Username indicates the user who has created the note.

Created indicates the time when the note was created.

Changed indicates when the note was last saved.

Expires indicates how long the note is valid.

Connection indicates which component the note relates to.

94

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 95: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Click View > Notes > Browse Notes to browse all existing notes using the Free DataForm.

Findings management8.22.3.

Select View > Findings to open the Findings dialog. Only findings that are not relatedto calls and findings related to active and visible calls are shown. For findings related tocalls, the Open Data Form button is enabled. Clicking Open Data Form opens the callrelated to the finding in the Disturbance Data Form.

To add a new finding in the network:1. Select View > Findings. The Findings dialog opens.2. Click Add.3. Give a code for the finding.4. Insert a finding text into the dialog.5. Click New location and then click the desired place in the network window to locate

the note.6. Creation time is given automatically, but you can change the time, if needed.

To open the findings management dialog, select View > Findings or click an existingfinding. Select the finding from the list to show the finding text and creation time.

To update the finding text, click Save.

To show the location of the selected finding, click Locate

To remove the selected finding, click Delete.

Map printing8.23.

Map printing procedure8.23.1.

The DMS 600 software contains versatile graphical printing properties. Database data,together with geographical background maps, give plenty of alternatives to print outnetwork diagrams, site maps, substation diagrams and so on.

To print maps:1. Select File > Map Printing Setup or File > Print Preview/Map Printing.2. Define the printing parameters. For more information about parameters, see

8.23.2, Map printing parameters .3. Select File > Print Preview/Map Printing and click OK. A white rectangle is

displayed on the network window. The size and direction of the rectangle correspondwith the chosen scale and the printer's paper size settings.

4. Define the area to be printed by dropping the rectangle down by clicking the leftmouse button. Before setting the area, you can freely zoom and pan the network

95

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 96: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

window (the white rectangle temporarily disappears). Cancel the function with theEsc key.

5. The network map with the legend and info texts is shown in a print preview window.Click Print to print the map.

The color and line width of unsupplied lines are used in the printing of colored map. Theblack dotted line with defined line width is used for unsupplied lines in black and whiteprinting, or also in color printing, if the defined color is white or close to white.

The printer setup can be done either with File > Printer Setup command or with PrinterSetup in the Map Printing dialog box.

Map printing parameters8.23.2.

Table 8.23.2-1 Map printing parametersNotes:Function:Field or button:

The list of the scales can beused. The user can also give afree number, for example, 4500defines the scale to be 1:4500.

Defines the scale which is usedin printing.

Scale

The best color depends on theprinter used. Grey is a goodcolor for black and white Post-script laser printers. Black mustbe chosen for normal black andwhite laser printers.

Defines the color used as thebackground color for black andwhite raster map materialprinting.

Output color

Defines the darkness of thecolor used as the backgroundcolor for black and white rastermap material printing.

Shade of gray

Defines the title for the print.Title

Defines the specification for theprint.

Specification

Contains the name of thebackground map file (mapsheet).

Chart

Default DMS 600 username.Defines the drawer for the print.Drawer

Defines whether the title textsare printed or not.

Print Legend

Defines whether the under-ground cables are printed withdash lines or not.

Underground Cables UsingDash Line

Defines whether the indicatoris printed or not.

Print Scale Indicator

96

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 97: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Notes:Function:Field or button:

Defines whether the additionaltext is printed or not.

Print Out

Locate Legend in (bottom left,upper right corner) (radio but-ton)

Write the additional text to beprinted out on the bottom-leftcorner of the map printout.

Opens the Notepad® software.Edit

Same function as File > PrinterSetup.

Opens the standard PrintSetup dialog box

Printer setup

Function is available in DMS600 NE with at least one LVnetwork loaded.

Defines the printed text labelfor customer nodes. It can beone of the fields in CUS-TOMER table or, by default, thedata in the network window.

Customer node output

Define the network line width in map printing using the Line width scale fact. in mapprinting field (for more information about setting the line width, see 8.23.2, Map printingparameters).

Managing switching plans8.24.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license with the Operations Planningsublicense is required for the management of switching plans.

Select Operations > Switching Plan Management to open the dialog box used tomanage all switching plans. The list in the dialog contains all plans and the followingstates of the plans:

Table 8.24-1 States of planMeaning:State:

Saved plans before execution.Planning

Plans during execution until all the switchingactions of a switching sequence are executed.

Execution

Plans after the switching sequence is executed.Executed

Plans after the outage reporting.Reported

Contingency Analysis plans.Contingency Analysis

Select the plan and make changes with the following buttons:

97

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 98: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Table 8.24-2 Buttons for making changes to planNotes:Function:Button:

Opens a dialog in which youcan change the planned start-ing time of the selected plan.

Start Time

Opens a dialog in which youcan change the planned endingtime of the selected plan.

End Time

Responsibility can be given toanother user and can bechanged after the confirmation.This function is enabled if theuser has rights to executeswitching plans.

Opens a dialog in which youcan take responsibility for theexecution of the selected plan.

Responsibility

See 13.2.2, Manual switchingsequence creation.

Opens selected plan in theSequence Management dia-log.

Open plan

Removes the selected plan.Remove plan

See 13.2.2, Manual switchingsequence creation

Opens the empty SequenceManagement dialog.

New Plan

Imports planning files made inthe older version of DMS 600WS (Opera WS).

Update Old Plan

Default directory for planningfiles is DATA directory of thefile server. You can select tochange the saving locations,but in such cases the planmight be inaccessible to otherusers.

Enables the changing of thelocation where the planning fileis saved.

Move File

See 14.4.1, General aboutreporting fault and maintenanceoutagesand 8.10, Browsing thearchives.

Enables the transferring of theselected switching sequence tothe maintenance outagearchive. The switchingsequence must be executedand reported.

Archive

Highlights all switches of listedplans in the network window.

Show Locations

When selected, you can openan existing or a new plan tocreate Contingency Analysissequences including the Ana-lyze Contingency commandsand measurement valuechanges for motors and gener-ators. The Move File button isreplaced by the Create Contin-gency button.

Contingency Analysis (radiobutton)

98

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 99: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Notes:Function:Button:

When selected, you can openexisting or new plans to createnormal Switching plansequences. Move File buttonis visible instead of CreateContingency button.

Switching planning (radio but-ton)

Moves the selected switchingplan to the DATA\Contingency-Plans directory and changesthe state of the plan to "Contin-gency Analysis"(seeTable 8.24-1).

Create Contingency

Trouble call management8.25.

About Trouble Call Management8.25.1.

Trouble Call Management is used to handle customer complaints and fault notifications.Trouble Call Management uses the Disturbance Data Form to collect information aboutthe faults, such as the nature and location of the fault.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Trouble call management sublicense is required for thefunctions.

Managing customer calls in DMS 600 Workstation8.25.2.

The active calls in DMS 600 Workstation can be managed with the Disturbance Callsdialog.

In DMS 600 Workstation only those active calls are shown, that are set to be visible. Ifthe user has not set visible call classes, system default settings of visible call classes areused.

To set visible calls:1. Open DMS 600 Workstation, and select View > Show > Disturbance Call Classes.2. Select Desired Call classes to be visible.3. To save visible call classes for the user, click Save.4. To view the system default settings, click Restore system defaults.5. To save system default settings, click Save system defaults (available with admin

rights).

99

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 100: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

To open the Calls dialog:1. Open DMS 600 Workstation, and select Window > Disturbance Calls.

To open the Disturbance Data Form:1. Open DMS 600 Workstation, and select File > Open Disturbance Data Form.

The following table lists other commands for the Disturbance Calls dialog.

Table 8.25.2-1 Disturbance Calls dialog and menu commandsDescriptionDialog or menu command

Only active and visible calls are presented indialog (and in the network window).

Calls are sorted in the tree:

• Feeders• All protection devices feeding customer (LV

Network or MV customer)• LV Network

• Customer Calls• MV Customer

• Customer Calls• Unsupplied customer

• Customer Calls• Unknown

• Customer Calls with unknown locationor powered without protection device

Disturbance calls dialog

Call tree shortcut menu commands:

Locate: Locates the call in the network window.

Open data form: Opens call in DisturbanceData Form.

Deactivate: Deactivates the call.

Customer Call

Locate: Locates LV Network or MV Customerin the network window.

Deactivate: Deactivates all calls from the LVnetwork or MV customer.

LV network and MV customer

Trace: Traces network feed by protection devicein the network window.

Create Fault: Creates a fault for the networkfeed by protection device.

Outage Inference: Checks number of the callsfrom the feed network and suggest a protectiondevice to create a fault (either selected deviceor any device feed by selected one).

Deactivate: Deactivates all calls from the LVnetworks or MV customers feed by protectiondevice.

Protection device

100

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 101: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

DescriptionDialog or menu command

Outage Inference: Checks amount of the callsand suggest a protection device(s) to create afault.

Deactivate: Deactivates all calls from LV net-works or MV customers fed by any protectiondevice.

Feeders

Deactivate: Deactivates all calls from unsup-plied LV networks or MV customers.

Unsupplied customer

Deactivate: Deactivates all calls with unknownlocation.

Unknown

Using Disturbance Data Form8.25.3.

Customer Servant user account

The Customer Servant user account is a user account with restricted rights. The userhas the right to add a new fault finding based on the information given by the customer.Other writing rights are not permitted. It is based on the assumption that the customerhas seen the fault and is able to provide the exact location of fault. The Customer Servantuser account has all the normal reading rights. It can be managed in DMS 600 NetworkEditor and DMS 600 Workstation. The Customer Servant user account is intended forthe users of Disturbance Data Form.

For more information about creating user accounts, see System Administration manual.

Handling customer contacts with Disturbance Data Form

The Disturbance Data Form can use only existing customer information. It is not usedfor updating, deleting or creating new customers.

Customer contacts can be used in several different ways:• Adding customer to a call• Finding calls received from a specific customer• Query customer's interruption history• Locating customer on DMS600WS map• Query current customer supply information• Query all currently unsupplied customers

101

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 102: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Changing Disturbance Data Form settings

Table 8.25.3-1 Disturbance Data Form settingsMeaningPossible valuesSetting

If set (value = True), DDFchecks automatically interrup-tion status of searched cus-tomer with the Customer statusenquiry function.

False or TrueAutomatic Supply StateInformation

If set (value = True) and localWS instance exists, DDF loc-ates searched customer auto-matically with the Locate cus-tomer function.

False or TrueAutomatic Customer Locationon map

If false, all DMS 600 WS integ-ration options are hidden.

False or TrueUse DMS 600 WS Integration

The computer name where theDMS 600 WS used in theintegration function is located.

LOCALDMS Computer Name

Searching customer information

The purpose of the Customer Search function is to find information of a calling customer,or the MV/LV substation, to which the customer belongs. The customer information canbe searched based on the content of the Customer table.

To search customer information from the database:1. In the Search Tasks list, click Customer.2. Select the search rule from the drop-down menu and click Search. Only one search

criteria per time is allowed.3. List of customers is shown in the results section. If you select one of the customers

from the list, the call history of the customer is read from database.

After the customer has been searched, you can manually locate the customer.

To manually locate customers:1. Select a customer from the list.2. Click Locate.

Searching customer call history

Call information can be searched based on different search criteria. Calls matching withthe search criteria are shown and can be viewed in detail.

Calls matching all given search criteria (input) are searched from the database.

102

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 103: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

To search customer call history:1. In the Search Tasks list, click Call History.2. Select the search rule from the drop-down menu and click Search.3. List of calls matching the search criteria is shown in the results section. Select a call

from the list to view more detailed information.

Browsing customer interruption history

The interruption history of a specific customer can be searched, for example, if there arecontinuous blackouts, or a specific blackout needs to be located.

To search for customer interruption history:1. Enter the begin and/or end time for the search, or leave the search field empty to

list all interruptions.2. The interruptions between the given begin time and end time are listed. Both main-

tenance outages and fault interruptions are listed. If only the begin time is given, allthe interruptions after that time are shown. If only the end time is given, all theinterruptions before that time are shown. If no limitations are defined, all the inter-ruptions are shown.

Saving disturbance call information to database

A new disturbance call is created to store call information to the database.

To create a new call:1. Click New Call in the Tasks list. Data input for a new call is enabled in the user

interface.2. After the New call function is started, the status bar of the main window indicates

that the program is in Receive call state.3. To point the fault location to a map, click Point Fault Location to Map in the

Tasks list.4. To save the new call information to the database, click End Call in the Tasks list.

Checking customer status

You can check, if a calling customer is already in a known fault area. The caller can thenbe directly informed about the fault situation.

Start the customer status enquiry manually by clicking the Check status button. Thereceived status information is presented in the Status information frame of the DisturbanceData Form. Check status is disabled, if no customer is selected.

103

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 104: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Topology management9.

Basic functions in topology management9.1.

General about topology management9.1.1.

Topology management in the DMS 600 WS network is an advanced and computerizedmethod which replaces the pins on a wall and/or mimics.

The state of switches defines the topology of the network. Topology management inDMS 600 WS is based on the integration of DMS 600 and MicroSCADA (for moreinformation about integration, see System Administration and Integration with SYS600). DMS 600 WS contains information on the switching state of the distribution net-work, that is, information on the states of all remotely and manually operated switches(including fuses) and line sections. In addition, you can use the manually updateablemeasurement data of border switches in topology management (for more informationabout border switches, see 8.19.2, Inserting the value for additional load and borderswitch).

The states of switches that are connected to MicroSCADA are updated using theMicroSCADA station and control pictures or control dialogs. If there is no connectionbetween DMS 600 and MicroSCADA, DMS 600 WS opens a dialog box in which youcan update the state of the switch. The status of line sections is always updated in DMS600 WS.

Switch state quality (status) received from SCADA9.1.2.

The DMS 600 interface to SCADA systems includes separate management of switchstate and its quality data. Separate symbols can be defined for uncertain switch states(open, uncertain or closed, uncertain). These symbols are used when a switch state isknown in SCADA database but switch quality is uncertain.

In an OPC interface, OPC quality QUALITY_UNCERTAIN and in a SCIL API interface,status values 1, 2 or 3 are interpreted as uncertain.

OPC quality QUALITY_BAD or SCIL API status 10 (not sampled) will cause the stateof a switch be shown as error.

The user can define whether uncertain state will cause the network coloring to useunknown color. Error state will always cause unknown coloring for the network.

104

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 105: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Monitoring network topology9.1.3.

Normally the medium voltage network is visible in network windows. Low voltagenetworks are always read separately to the memory. All functions focus on the activenetwork.

Every change in the state of the switches causes an update in the network topology (unlessthe topology is disabled in the general settings, for more information about general set-tings, see 7.4.1, Defining automatic function settings). The new network topology isimmediately shown in the user interface.

After a failure in the MicroSCADA system or in data transfer between DMS 600 WSand MicroSCADA, the real time switch status is read from MicroSCADA and the networktopology is updated accordingly.

The switch and measurement objects can have both an OPC code and a scadacode defined.If the OPC interface is closed in DMS 600 SA, the switch states and measurement valueshaving scadacode definition are still transferred through the SCIL API interface.

If the OPC interface is closed in DMS 600 WS, the switch states and measurement valuesthat are transferred through the SCIL API interface of DMS 600 SA are also transferredto DMS 600 WS.

Select View > Coloring > Topology by Feeders to display the adjacent feeders of thereal time topology with different colors. The feeder topology color settings are used innetwork diagrams, internal station diagrams, and in the root points of MicroSCADAstation and control pictures.

Select View > Coloring > Topology by Primary Transformers to display all lines fedfrom the same transformer in the real time topology with a common color.

Select Window > Notices and Events to open a window containing the last alarms ofDMS 600 WS.

Network topology coloring has special colors for the following (these also generate awarning to the list):• Looped connections (alarm also)• Unsupplied lines (alarm also)• Uncertain state• Grounded lines (temporary grounding or grounding switch).

The state of a switch is shown with the defined symbols of the network.

The definition of symbols and line colors is made by DMS 600 NE (for more informationabout definitions, see System Administration).

105

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 106: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Showing downstream and upstream traces9.1.4.

Traces in network window9.1.4.1.

A downstream trace refers to all the line sections fed via the selected line section. Anupstream trace refers to the line sections that feed the selected line section. You can usethe trace functions, for example, to check what influences the opening of a switch has,or to check the connectivity of network components. You can use the trace functions,for example, to check the connectivity of components in an inserted network.

To start the trace functions in network window, select the Trace downstream and Traceupstream commands or open the shortcut menu by clicking the right mouse button ona line section in the main network window.After the selection, the trace is colored withthe warning color.

Trace coloring is visible during panning and zooming. To cancel trace, right-click onnetwork window and select Remove trace from the pop up menu.

After clicking a location with several switches the Choose switching device dialog isopened. In this dialog, select a switch and click Trace to show the downstream trace ofthe switch in the main network window.

Traces in network diagrams9.1.4.2.

To start the trace functions in the network diagram window, use the mouse buttons.

To color the downstream trace in both the network diagram window and the main networkwindow, right-click a line section in the network diagram.

To color the upstream trace in both the network diagram window and the main networkwindow, right-click a line section in network diagram while holding the shift key down.

Switching devices along trace9.1.4.3.

To use the Switching devices along the trace functionality, select Show switching devicesalong trace. The dialog shows all switching devices along the selected trace in the tracingorder. Also the type and current state of each switch is shown.

It is possible to locate a switch in the dialog and change its switching state. If the stateof any of the switches is changed, the trace will be cancelled and the dialog will be closed.

Traces from Monitor Pro graphics9.1.4.4.

When you select the SYS 600 downstream tracing function, the DMS 600 WS clientopens and shows the fed network in the network window. Right-click a circuit breaker

106

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 107: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

or line indicator in the SYS 600 station graphic and select Trace feeder from the popupmenu.

Showing abnormal switching states9.1.5.

To save the normal switching state of medium voltage networks to a file, select File >Save as Normal State.

To show the medium voltage switches whose state differ from the defined normalswitching state, select View > Show > Abnormal Switching States. You can use symbolsto find switches that should be restored to the normal state.

Showing LV switch changes9.1.6.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Low Voltage Networks license is required for low voltagenetworks.

The normal switching state of low voltage networks is saved to the network database inDMS 600 NE.

Select View > Show > LV Switch Changes to display switch changes with specialsymbols in the main network window.

During the first loading of LV network that contains LV switch changes, the user has tochoose whether the switch changes are loaded or not. The function thereafter dependson the selected option:

Table 9.1.6-1 Options during the first loading of LV network containing LV switchchanges

Function:Option:

Possible LV switch changes are executed foreach LV network to be loaded. No further con-firmation is asked.

Yes To All

Possible LV switch changes are not executedto any of the LV networks to be loaded. No fur-ther confirmation is asked.

No To All

Select File > Load LV Networks and click List changed to find all LV networks thathave switch changes.

107

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 108: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Finding unsupplied MV/LV stations and customers9.1.7.

Select View > Show > Unsupplied MV/LV Stations to display the unsupplied MV/LVstations as white symbols.

Select View > Unsupplied Customers (MV) to browse the unsupplied customer datausing free data forms. The data form can be used to browse the customer data or to locatethe customer.

Select View > Customer Information and click Unsupplied Customers in the CustomerSearch dialog to list the unsupplied customers. This function makes it possible to locatethe unsupplied customers.

Changing switching states9.2.

General about switching states9.2.1.

• The switching states of all switches connected to MicroSCADA (real process objectsand virtual process objects) are updated using the MicroSCADA station and controlpictures or control dialogs.

• If there is no connection between DMS 600 and MicroSCADA for a switch, DMS600 WS opens a dialog box in which you can update the state of the switch.

• The state of line sections is always updated in DMS 600 WS.

DMS 600 WS has to be in State Monitoring Mode when updating the real time state ofthe switches. In Simulation Mode the changes are saved temporarily for the use of theworkstation.

In Automatic Fault Isolation and Restoration Mode, DMS600 WS performs the switching actions automatically.

Changing switching state of switches connected to MicroSCADA9.2.2.

Switches that are connected to the MicroSCADA process can be either remotely operatedreal process objects or manually operated virtual process objects. For more informationabout the integration of switches, see System Administration and Integration with SYS600.

The switching states of switches are updated with the dialog boxes of DMS 600 WSonly if there is a failure in the MicroSCADA system or in the data transfer between DMS600 WS and MicroSCADA (for more information, see 9.2.4, Changing switching stateof switches not connected to MicroSCADA). In that case, DMS 600 WS prompts aswitch to Simulation Mode. When data transfer capabilities are recovered, the real timeswitch status is read from MicroSCADA and the network topology is updated accordingly.

108

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 109: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

To update the state of a switch connected to the MicroSCADA process:1. Select a switch or station with the mouse from the network window or network

diagram in DMS 600 WS. The MicroSCADA station and control picture opens.You can also select File > Change Switch State or View > Station diagram toselect the switch or station. When SYS 600 is used and switch configuration filesare available, you can open the control dialog for remote controlled switches directlyby selecting the switch from the network window, network or station diagram, orswitch device lists. You have control rights in the opened control dialog only if yourusername and password in the DMS 600 match with the user information in SYS600 and if you are authorized to control the selected switch.

2. Change the state of the switch. The topology of DMS 600 WS is automaticallyupdated in the network window (if not disabled in the general settings). For moreinformation about general settings, see 7.4.1, Defining automatic function settings).

Manual state update for switches connected to MicroSCADA9.2.3.

Disconnectors and circuit breakers normally receive status information from SCADA,but they can be changed into manual mode in DMS 600. In the manual mode, the statecan be updated like any switches that are not connected to SCADA.

Manual state can be used, for example, as a temporary solution to update and monitorthe state if communication to the station is down. Closed and temporarily open manuallyupdatable switches have different symbols.

To change a switch into manual mode right click the switch and select Manual stateupdate. This option is available only for switches that are connected to MicroSCADAand that are not in manual mode. The switch changes into manual mode, and a dialogopens, where you can update the state of the switch. If the quality of the switch wasuncertain or bad, it will be restored to normal.

To restore the switch back to the normal update mode, unselect Manual state updatefrom the state change dialog or right click the switch and select Remove manual update.

To restore all switches back into normal mode, select File > Remove Manual StateUpdate from the menu.

Changing switching state of switches not connected toMicroSCADA

9.2.4.

It is recommended to connect all switches to MicroSCADA.

The state of the switches not connected to MicroSCADA (not defined as real or virtualMicroSCADA process objects), is updated using a dialog box in DMS 600 WS. For

109

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 110: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

more information about integration, see System Administration Manual and Integrationwith SYS 600.

To update switches not connected to MicroSCADA:1. Select a switch by clicking it in the network window or in the network or station

diagram in DMS 600 WS. You can also select File > Change Switch State to selectthe switch. The state of the selected switch is shown in a dialog box.

2. Change the state of the switch.3. Modify the time of the state update, if necessary. After the time has been modified,

also the event list can be updated accordingly and, for example, outage reports canuse correct event times. The time given cannot be later than the present time. Thecontrol accepts only known values and can be edited by writing a new value orchanging the current value using the up and down arrow keys.

When closing a switch to form a loop, DMS 600 makes the following verifications:• The nominal (static) network voltage levels must match. If they don't, a warning is

given.• The Phasor Group Codes must match. If they don't, a warning is given.

If these verifications are OK, the system will ask you whether it is OK to form a loop.This question is dependent on user-specific settings.

Changing switching state of line sections9.2.5.

The states of line sections is always updated in DMS 600 WS. It is possible to manageseveral temporary earthings and open line section points in a single section.

To update the states of a line section:1. Select File > Change Line State.2. Select the line section in the network window or network or station diagram in DMS

600 WS.

Alternatively, you can right click on a section and select Change Line State.

The selected line is colored with a reverse color and the states of the selected line sectionare shown in a dialog box.

To add a new open line section point:1. Click New open line section.2. Point out a location for the new open line section point from the network window.

To add a new temporary earthing:1. Click New temporary earthing.2. Point out a location for the new temporary earthing from the network window.

To move an existing open line section point or temporary earthing:1. Select an existing open line section point or temporary earthing from the list.

110

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 111: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

2. Click Move.3. Point out a new location from the network window.

To remove an existing open line section point or temporary earthing:1. Select an existing open line section point or temporary earthing from the list.2. Click Remove.

To save changes made to the selected section, click Update.

To cancel changes made to the selected section:1. Click Close without clicking Update.2. Answer No to question 'Save Changes?'

The topology of DMS 600 WS is automatically updated in the network window (if notdisabled in the general settings). For more information about general settings, see7.4.1, Defining automatic function settings.

Changing LV switch states9.2.6.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Low Voltage Networks license is required for low voltagenetworks.

To change the switching state of the low voltage network:1. Load the LV network.2. Change the switch state.3. Select the Save changes to database check box.The changes in LV switch states are saved for the further use.

The changes in LV switch states cannot be shown in the main network window if theappropriate low voltage network is not loaded into the memory. For more informationabout showing the LV switch changes, see 9.1.6, Showing LV switch changes.

Checking switching actions9.3.

If the checking of switching actions is enabled in system settings (for more informationabout general settings, see 7.4.1, Defining automatic function settings), the checking ofthe connection between the supplied network and a loop or an earthed network is per-formed when you select an open switch in DMS 600 WS.

If the closing of the selected switch will cause a loop connection or connection to anearthed network, an alarm is given before opening the MicroSCADA station or controlpicture, control dialog, or internal dialog box.

111

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 112: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

The alarm is given only when the switch is selected from theuser interface of DMS 600 WS. When the switch is selectedfrom the MicroSCADA station or control picture, the checkingis not performed before the switching action. In this case, thealarm is given just after topology monitoring.

112

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 113: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

AMR user interface integration10.

AMR menu items10.1.

All menu items related to AMR user interface integration are located in the Fault menu.

AMR_Fault_menu.jpg

Figure 10.1-1 Fault menu

The fault menu items and their functions are described in the following list.

• Open AMR interface opens the AMR interface for continuous notifications of newand changed AMR faults.

• Close AMR interface closes the AMR interface. No messages are received andhandling of the existing AMR faults is disabled.

• AMR events... opens the main dialog for AMR fault handling. For more informationsee 10.3.1, About AMR fault handling dialog.

• Find meters… opens the meter finder dialog. For more information see 10.5, Meterfinder dialog.

The Open AMR interface and Close AMR interface menuitems are available only in workstations not defined as themaster AMR Fault Handler. For more information on how todefine the master workstation see the AMR configurationdocument.

113

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 114: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Drawing symbols and their locations10.2.

AMR fault symbols are drawn in the network view window. The location of the drawingsymbol depends on the state of the low voltage network where it occurs. If the low voltagenetwork is loaded into the memory, the drawing symbol is located next to the faultedcustomer location. If the low voltage network is not loaded, the drawing symbol is locatednext to the feeding mv/lv transformer.

You can see more information about the current state of a single AMR fault by movingthe mouse over the AMR fault drawing symbol. The tool tip has two modes. You canview the extended information by moving the mouse over the tool tip window and byclicking it.

AMR_fault_view.jpg

Figure 10.2-1 AMR fault state details

The workstation defined as the AMR Fault Administrator loads the low voltage networksinto memory on demand. Other workstations do not automatically load low voltagenetworks.

AMR fault handling10.3.

About AMR fault handling dialog10.3.1.

The dialog for AMR fault handling contains two tab pages. The Active alarms tab showsall currently active faults. The Events tab shows all AMR events.

The dialog is resizable so that all information can be seen at once.

Active alarms tab10.3.2.

The alarm list is dynamic. This means that as the system receives information about anew event, it adds, combines or removes faults. The fault is automatically removed fromthe lists when reset event is received.

Faults are grouped by their type. The tree control on the left side of the windows presentsall active faults under its correct category. The fault is identified by the LV networkcode. If the alarms can be caused by blowing of a common feeding fuse, only one faultis presented. In other cases, the same LV network can be listed several times.

The list control on the right side of the window shows all fault events belonging to theselected fault on the tree control. For a selected fault, the most likely fault location is

114

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 115: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

shown in the network window with trace color, if the LV network is loaded into memory.For the faults of type Fuse burnt, the whole disturbed area is shown in the networkwindow with trace color.

The dialog functions Locate and LV network are only available when you have selecteda fault on the right side of the dialog.

Locate

The selected fault can be located on the geographical map presentation. The defaultlocating mark shows the location of the customer and the MV/LV transformer. You canlocate the fault also by double-clicking the fault area in the list view.

LV network

The selected low voltage network is loaded into the memory. After the low voltage net-work has been loaded, all existing fault symbols are presented next to the faulted customerposition.

Events tab10.3.3.

The Events tab shows all received AMR fault messages. The list acts as a short historyreference for AMR related events. Use this list to see, for example, when a reset eventfor particular fault situation has been received.

It is also possible to fetch events of a certain period from the database log by right-clicking the fault row and selecting More events.

115

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 116: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Events_tab.jpg

Figure 10.3.3-1 Events tab of the AMR fault handling dialog

Creating LV outage reports using AMR events10.4.

You can create and update outage reports of the events in the AMR fault handlingdialog. If the LV report dialog is not yet open, a short cut menu command CreateReport will appear for each LV network fault type event with a starting time. Thiscommand makes a new report and picks the beginning time from the event. When theLV report dialog is already open, you can select Use Event Time to view the endingtime for the report or, to modify the starting time of the report.

Meter finder dialog10.5.

The Meter finder dialog can be used to locate configured meter on the geographicalmap presentation. The search is performed using the current states of the configurationitems on the OPC-server. For example, the search value must be 3 to find meters withlogging and sending an alarm for the selected fault type.

Search criteria

The search is based on three criteria. Criteria are the LV network, setting identifier andthe actual value for the setting identifier.

116

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 117: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Find_meters_dialog.jpg

Figure 10.5-1 Search criteria for finding meters

The dialog functions are described in the following list.

• LV network drop-down list contains all LV networks with configured meters. Ifmeters are configured to more than one LV network the list also contains a specialitem to mark for all networks (*.*).

• Only currently loaded LV networks. When you select this check box, the drop-down list contains identifiers for only the networks that are currently loaded intothe memory.

• The identifier of the searched setting. The values for this drop-down list are readfrom the configuration file (AmrConf.amr). Only the administrator modifies thesevalues.

• Description depends on the selection in the The identifier of the searched settinglist. The text shown is purely informative and has no real value in the search.

• Search value defines the search value for the selected search setting identifier.

The search presented in Figure 10.5-1 searches all configured meters located in the LVnetwork 5191 with the setting \11 (watch for fuse blows) of value 1 (logging). You cansee the returned match count at the bottom of the dialog. After a successful search, allreturned matches can be located on the graphical map presentation.

Meter settings10.6.

You can view and configure the meter settings in the Meter settings dialog. Open thedialog by right-clicking the customer node, and by selecting Meter settings....

117

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 118: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

AMR_popup.jpg

Figure 10.6-1 AMR popup window for adjusting meter settings

The Meter settings dialog is freely resizable. Items added to the list are automaticallyread from the AMR configuration file.

Meter_settings_dialog.jpg

Figure 10.6-2 Meter settings dialog

The fields and functions for reading and adjusting meter settings are described in thefollowing list.

• Name. The OPC tag name for this setting.• Description. Free setting description read from the configuration file.• Value range defined for this setting in the configuration file. This value gives a hint

about the limits within which the setting value should be.• Value. The current value of this setting item received from the OPC server.

118

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 119: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

• Write. The new value for this setting item. You can define the value by double-clicking the list item. Only OPC tags defined as writable by the OPC server may bewritten.

• Read Configuration allows the configuration files to be used for predefined settingvalues. For more information, see 10.8, AMR predefined settings files.

The dialog supports multiple OPC tags to be written at once.Each write operation makes a round-trip to the meter and back.To minimize the communication costs and delays, write allsettings of interest in one transaction. Select multiple OPCtags with the Ctrl or Shift keys.

Measurements10.7.

You can read AMR measurements from the actual meter in the Measurements dialog.Open the dialog by right-clicking the customer node, and by selecting Measurements....

AMR_popup.jpg

Figure 10.7-1 AMR popup window for reading measurement data

Items added to the list are automatically read from the AMR configuration file. Thedialog is freely resizable.

119

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 120: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Measurement_dialog.jpg

Figure 10.7-2 Measurement dialog for reading measurement data

The fields and their functions are described in the following list.

• Name. The OPC tag name for this setting.• Description. Free setting description from the configuration file.• Data source. When the dialog is initialized, the value for each measurements is

read from the OPC server. The text Cache means that the value is returned from theOPC servers cache. The actual value on the meter device may differ from this cachedvalue. The text Device means that the value is the actual value on the meter at thetime of reading.

• Value. The current value of the setting item received from the OPC server.

The dialog supports multiple OPC tags to be read at once.Each read operation makes a round-trip to the meter and back.To minimize the communication costs and delays, read allmeasurements of interest in one transaction. Select multipleOPC tags with the Ctrl or Shift keys.

AMR predefined settings files10.8.

Predefined configuration files are designed to help the meter configuration work. It ispossible to define meter configuration types and use the type to quickly download desiredsetting parameters. The file shall include all the parameters that need to be written to thedevice. It is possible to define multiple predefined configuration files for different pur-poses. The files must have .amr extension.

The file format is as follows:

120

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 121: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

[Values] // Mandatory header for settings file

////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

// Number of setting ( must have running sequence format )

// This is combined to the meter OPC- path to get fully qualifiedOPC- item tag

// Match the value with the setting item found from file AmrConf.amr

1=\11

// 'V' + number defined above indicates the actual configurationvalue

V1=3

// Define as many values as required using the same formula.

2=\12

V2=2

121

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 122: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Network and protection analysis11.

General about network and protection analysis11.1.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license is required for network andprotection analysis.

DMS 600 WS network analysis replaces traditional off-line calculations with on-linecalculations using the real-time state of the network.

With the network and protection analysis you can examine the electrical state of thenetwork and assure the technical functionality of the network in various circumstances.Network and protection analysis functions require the Network Analysis license.

Network analysis functions offer calculations for load flow and fault current (2- and 3-phase short-circuits and earth-faults) and the protection analysis of radial-operated andmeshed networks.

Generators and synchronous motors are taken into account as a source of short-circuitcurrent. The strong starting currents of asynchronous induction motors can be studiedin the load flow calculation. Additionally, distributed generators and capacitors are takeninto account in the load flow calculations. The calculations can also use measurementdata provided by MicroSCADA.

With the protection analysis function you can analyze overcurrent relays that have def-inite time-delays and inverse time types. The data source of all relay settings can bechanged between network models and active relay settings via MicroSCADA. In addition,the medium voltage fuses are taken into account during the protection analysis. The solidearthed networks and networks earthed via resistors are supported in the protectionanalysis.

The network analysis has different kind of aims in networkinformation system and distribution management system. Thenetwork analysis of the network information system is madein the peak load condition to be able to focus on theimprovements and additions of the network. With the networkanalysis of DMS 600 you can analyze the real-time networkstate and, thus, ensure the most effective and safe use of thenetwork. The load flow in DMS 600 is calculated using thegiven or estimated load information.

122

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 123: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Network analysis11.2.

Load modeling11.2.1.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license (with the Extended LoadModeling sublicense) is required for network analysis.

Load modeling uses Velander's factors or defined load models (load curves) to changeannual energy information for active and reactive power. The load model is selectednormally during the installation. The load model selection can be changed later on. Inthis case, the programs must be restarted and the network database updated.

The loads of MV/LV stations and customer nodes (if LV networks are included) and theeffect of capacitors are taken into account in load modeling during the network analysis.The loads inside the primary substations are not modeled. The load modeling uses single-line modeling that is capable to analyze balanced medium voltage networks (all mediumvoltage lines are 3-phased and the load on medium voltage side is nearly equally distrib-uted to all the three phases).

Manually updateable, separate load points connected to any node of the medium voltagenetwork can be used to model the separate load point, load of the border switch or backupfeeder from neighboring distribution network. The separate load points are taken intoaccount during the network calculation by adding the active power of the load point tothe active power of the node.

Manually updateable, separate load points connected to a disconnector that is the endingpoint of a branch, can be used to model an additional load or supply from a neighboringnetwork that is not included in the network database. If the state of this switch is 'open',the switch is handled normally in calculations. If the state is 'closed' and the value of themeasurement is negative (<0), the switch node supplies the electricity to the network.The branch either becomes energized or a loop connection is formed, if the electricitysupply to the switch is also coming from another direction. The discovery of the loopconnection is presented with a color code in the network window. If the supply is comingonly from the switch, the network supplied with this switch is colored with its own colorin the network window. This network is not calculated during the load flow calculation.If the positive active power measurement is inserted into the switch, the amount of activepower is added to the power of the node as in the case of separate load points.

123

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 124: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Load forecasting and load estimation11.2.2.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license (with the Extended LoadModeling sublicense) is required for network analysis.

Load forecasting is the calculation of the load forecast for MV/LV stations and linesections for the next 0 to 168 hours. The forecast is based on the load data of MV/LVstations or LV/MV network customers depending on the selected load modeling method.

Load estimation is the correction of loads given to MV/LV stations so that the total cal-culated loads of the feeders approximate to the current measurement of the feeder. Theelectrical state of the network can be calculated as accurately as possible. When there isno load estimation available, the forecasted loads are created directly from the givenMV/LV station load data.

DMS 600 SA automatically calculates a load estimation and a load forecast for theMV/LV stations once an hour. The calculations use the latest MicroSCADA measurementdata (for more information about MicroSCADA measurements, see 11.2.4, Using ofMicroSCADA measurement data in network analysis ). After the load forecast databaseis updated, it is loaded to be used in DMS 600 WS workstations.

DMS 600 SA starts a separate estimation process by default 5 minutes past each hour.It is recommended to update the real time estimated loads just after new hourly valuesare taken into use from the load curves. The time can be changed by adding a specialparameter to the settings file Common.prm. To change the time, add the following rowinto the [Common_Settings] section:

EstimationStartMinute=xx

xx is the start time in minutes after the hour.

In addition, DMS 600 SA reads measurement values two minutes before the estimationminute to ensure that recent estimation values are available. In normal case measurementsvalues are updated continually to the DMS 600 database just after the changes.

Showing load curve for MV/LV stations and line sections11.2.3.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license (with the Extended LoadModeling sublicense) is required for a network analysis.

124

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 125: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

DMS 600 SA maintains load forecasts for MV/LV stations as a background process.Load estimation is used to correct the given loads of MV/LV stations so that the totalcalculated load of the feeders approximates to the current measurement of the feeder(for more information about load estimation, see 11.2.2, Load forecasting and loadestimation). The load forecast of MV/LV stations is updated automatically in the databaseonce in an hour.

To show the load forecast graphically:• Open the shortcut menu by right-clicking a node or a line section. Select Load

Curve from the shortcut menu.• Click Load Curve in the node information dialog box.

The Load Curve dialog box contains the forecasted load of the appropriate line sectionor, if a MV/LV station is selected, the end node's forecasted load for the next week.• The green line describes the original real power load according to the load data of

the MV/LV station.• The red line describes the forecasted load generated in the load estimation.

The window also contains the forecasted maximum and minimum powers and theinterval of them from the present time. In case of a line section, the forecast calculationis started to illustrate the forecast in the window.

With the load curve information for a selected line section you can find a convenienttime period, for example, for a maintenance outage. To show the distance from thepresent time and the forecasted load in that time, click the load curve.

Using of MicroSCADA measurement data in network analysis11.2.4.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license is required for network analysis.

The configuration of the connection between MicroSCADA measurements and the DMS600 network database is made in DMS 600 NE (for more information about configura-tions, see System Administration).

If the measurement data is connected to the nodes of the network, the measurement dataserves as input data for the network analysis of DMS 600 WS in the following way:• To make the load data of the feeder and the MV/LV stations more accurate, use the

current measurement connected to the feeder's node or to the node that limits theMV/LV station and the feeder (node type feeder) during the load estimation (formore information about using the load estimation, see 11.2.2, Load forecasting andload estimation). The current measurements that are connected to a node whichbelongs to a feeding HV/MV substation cannot be used in the load estimation.

• A current measurement, an active power (P) measurement, or a reactive power (Q)measurement connected to a motor node: The change in motor measurement data

125

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 126: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

affects to the load flow calculation results in the radial calculation of WS. If onlycurrent measurement is available it is used so that the voltage in the measurementpoint is used to estimate the total power (S). In Simulation Mode the user can switchthe P and Q values. When returning to State Monitoring Mode the real measurementvalues are restored.

• A current measurement, an active power (P) measurement, or a reactive power (Q)measurement connected to a generator node that is connected to a Generator BlockTransformer: The change in generator measurement data affects to the meshed net-work load flow calculation results in loop calculation of WS. If only current meas-urement is available it is used so that the voltage in the measurement point is usedto estimate the total power (S). In Simulation Mode the user can switch the P andQ values. When returning to State Monitoring Mode the real measurement valuesare restored.

• Use the primary substation voltage measurement as a supplying voltage for feedersin the load flow calculations. When available, always use the measured voltageinstead of the primary transformer's nominal voltage from default busbar voltagesettings (for more information about default settings, see 7.6.1, General about networkand protection analysis settings). The voltage measurement must be connected to anode belonging to the HV/MV substation which is used in the calculation. A voltagemeasurement connected to a feeder node cannot be used in the calculation.

• Separate load points connected to any node of the medium voltage network can beused in network calculations. The separate load points are taken into account duringnetwork calculation by adding the active power of the measurement to the activepower of the node.

• Separate load points connected to a disconnector that is the ending point of a branchcan be used to model additional loads or a supply from a neighboring network thatis not included in the network database.

For more information about inserting the value for manually updateable load point, see8.19.2, Inserting the value for additional load and border switch.

Using starting motors in network analysis11.2.5.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license is required for a network ana-lysis.

The use of starting motor data means that the real and reactive powers of inductionmotors are replaced with the starting current and power factor during a network analysis.

You can define only induction motors to be used as a startingstate in the network analysis.

126

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 127: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

To define induction motors that are in the starting state:1. Select Analyze > Starting Motors. The dialog opens and shows all induction motors.2. Select one or more motors from the list.

You can leave the dialog open to easily change the selected starting induction motors.

Performing network analysis11.2.6.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license is required for a network ana-lysis.

When the start up process is completed, DMS 600 WS is in State Monitoring Mode (ifthe fault location is not started). A medium voltage network topology is displayed in themain network window.

The network analysis is automatically performed during the start up process. The networkand the results of the network analysis in the network windows are based on data fromthe network database, temporary network and real time switching state. The feedingvoltage (busbar voltage) is received from a primary substation voltage measurement orfrom primary transformer settings and the loads are received from the given loadinformation and from separate load points. The current measurement is used during theload estimation to make the load data of the feeder and MV/LV stations more accurate.An auxiliary window contains the voltage drops in different parts of this existing mediumvoltage network. The default contents of the windows can be changed during projecting.

The change in network and/or switching state data automatically recalculates the networkand updates network topology on screen (if not disabled in the general settings. For moreinformation about general settings, see 7.4.1, Defining automatic function settings). Theanalysis is executed for radial feeders. After this the meshed network load flow andmaximum short-circuit current calculation for the whole medium voltage network areperformed automatically, if this is configured in the settings and the time interval fromthe last calculation has elapsed (for more information about general settings, see7.4.1, Defining automatic function settings).

If a current measurement, an active power (P) measurement, or a reactive power (Q)measurement are connected to a motor node, the change in the motor measurement dataaffects the load flow calculation results in the radial calculation of WS. If only the currentmeasurement is available, it is used so that the voltage in measurement point is used toestimate the total power (S).

The meshed network load flow is calculated for the total network even if it consists ofseveral isolated networks. An isolated island is a part of network fed by one or severalprimary feeding transformers but isolated from other network. Several islands can beconnected to each other but isolated by open switches. If automatically meshed network

127

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 128: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

analysis is used, the maximum short-circuit currents are calculated for all the isolatedislands after a change in switch status (for more information about general settings, see7.4.1, Defining automatic function settings).

If a current measurement, an active power (P) measurement, or a reactive power (Q)measurement are connected to a generator node that is connected to a Generator BlockTransformer, the change in generator measurement data affects the meshed network loadflow calculation results of the loop calculation.

When the automatic updating of radial feeders or meshed networks is not in use, youcan select Analyze > Network & Protection and Analyze > Meshed Network Analysisto execute a network analysis.

Showing network analysis result11.2.7.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license is required for a network ana-lysis.

Change the presentation of network analysis results in the active window by using theView menu. The electrical state of the network is indicated with colors in the networkwindow. For more detailed description on the commands, see 6.4.7, Coloring in networkand protection analysis. The administrator makes the definition of the network line colors(for more information about definition of the network lines, see System Administration).

The presentation of the network analysis results depends on the user-defined settings.For more information about the settings, see 7.5.3, Settings of coloring limits for networkand protection analysis. If the calculated values exceed the corresponding limit settings,the network analysis results are presented with the colors of warning level and alarmlevel. In network coloring, the short-circuit capacity and detection ability for loopednetwork parts are marked with undefined colors. You cannot perform any protectioncoordination checks for looped network parts.

Table 11.2.7-1 Definitions for network analysis resultsDefinition of resultNetwork analysis

100% of the calculated voltage of line sectiondivided by nominal voltage of the line section

Voltage drops in medium and low voltage net-works

100% of the minimum calculated short circuitcurrent divided by minimum operation currentof protection device(s)

Detection ability of short-circuit protection inmedium voltage networks and fault current/fusevalue in low voltage networks

100% of the conductor type over current capa-city divided by the square root of minimumoperation time of the protection device(s) whichuses the maximum calculated fault current

3-phase short-circuit capacity in medium voltagenetworks and in the detection of short-circuitprotection in low voltage networks

128

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 129: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Definition of resultNetwork analysis

The smaller values from 100% of the calculatedearth fault current divided by protectiondevice(s) current setting or 100% of the calcu-lated zero voltage divided by the protectiondevice's zero voltage setting.

Detection ability of earth-fault protection inmedium voltage networks

100% of the calculated load current divided byconductor type load current capacity.

Load levels in medium voltage networks anddetection of overload protection in low voltagenetworks

To see a numerical presentation of the network analysis of a node/line section in a sep-arate dialog (the data of the dialog can be defined during projecting):

• Click an object in a network window or network diagram.

OR

• Open the shortcut menu by right-clicking the node or line section. Select NodeInformation.

Use Window > Notices and Events command to open a window containing the lastalarms and warnings (for example, the exceeding of limit settings in network analysis).

Feeder power and loss reports11.2.8.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license is required for feeder load flowreports .

The estimation program maintains load flow calculation results in the database of eachMV feeder of each hour of the current and previous month. Each hour that the loadestimation is run, the program also updates the feeder results for all feeders. This includesall feeders even if no measurement value for the load estimation has been defined forthe feeder. The data of previous months will be removed at the beginning of a new month.

The load flow calculation uses estimated loads for MV/LV substations when measure-ments have been defined. If needed, the functionality can be removed by adding a linefor key LossReporter=0 under section [Common_settings] in Common.prm file.

The results include active power (P), reactive power (Q), active power losses, reactivepower losses, energy, energy loss and biggest voltage drop for each feeder and hour.The MS Access based reporting tool (FeederReport.mdb) provides results of peak loadhours. The data can naturally be fetched from relational database server using linkedtables.

129

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 130: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Feeder report tool (FeederReport.mdb in Data subdirectory) has three different selectionsof which the contents of reports can be selected.

• Scope• Time• Results

In Scope, you can select which feeder or feeders are included in the reports. You canalso select the entire network to be reported.

In Time, you can select the time of the report. You can select the current or previousmonth to be reported. You can also define any time interval for the report by using freeselection.

In Results, you can define the level of details to be presented in the report. The followingoptions are possible:

• Per network, when there is one row in the report summing the results based on theselected option in Scope.

• Per station, when there is one row for each station in the report summing the resultsbased on the selected option in Scope.

• Per feeder, when there is one row for each feeder in the report summing the resultsbased on the selected option in Scope.

If you select the output type as report, the results are always presented as Per feederselection.

Depending on the input in the field Output type, the results are presented in a table orreport format. In Table format, the included data depends on the input in the Resultsfield.

Figure 11.2.8-1 shows the results per station when there is one row for each station. Thevalues in this case are the sum of feeders in each substation. In the reports, each feederis presented on a separate row. In addition, the sum of feeders is presented on the substa-tion row, and the sum of all substations on the network row.

130

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 131: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

power_loss_report.JPG

Figure 11.2.8-1 Example of a power loss report

Protection analysis11.3.

Using of relay settings in protection analysis11.3.1.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license is required for a protectionanalysis.

Relay settings are inserted into the network database. You can also perform the protectionanalysis for the SPACOM and RED 500 type relays by using relay settings that areobtained via MicroSCADA and are stored in the network database .

To define the data source for relay settings of all relays in the network, select File >Relay Data Source > Relay or File > Relay Data Source > Network Model.

The administrator can change the relay settings in the network database in DMS 600 NE(for more information about relay settings, see System Administration).

131

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 132: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Showing protection relay settings data11.3.2.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license is required for a protectionanalysis.

The protection relay settings are used in the protection analysis. Relay data can be shownusing one of the following alternatives:1. Right-click the node or line section in the main network window and select Relay.2. Click an object in a network window or network diagram or right-click the node or

line section in the main network window and select Node Information. Then clickRelay to see the relay data dialog of the corresponding feeder.

3. Perform protection analysis. Select the relay and click the Relay Settings button toshow the relay settings of the appropriate relay. If you select the fuse and click DataForm, the free data form of the fuse is opened.

In State Monitoring Mode it is possible to browse only relay settings data. Relay settingsare inserted into the network database. The administrator can change relay settings per-manently in DMS 600 NE (for more information about relay settings, see SystemAdministration).

For relays whose type is SPACOM or RED 500, the protection analysis can also beperformed using relay settings obtained via MicroSCADA. The settings are stored tothe network database. For more information about using relay settings via MicroSCADA,see 11.3.1, Using of relay settings in protection analysis.

The data source for all relays in State Monitoring Mode can be changed workstationspecifically between the network model and relay active settings via MicroSCADA byselecting File > Relay Data Source > Network Model and File > Relay Data Source> Relay. The loaded settings are used for all protection analysis calculations.

Notices of protection analysis11.3.3.

The Notices list contains information on the protection analysis. The information includesshort circuit capacity (overheating), fault detection ability (with given relay settings) andload-protection coordination checks. In a load-protection check the system checks if thecalculated load current can cause a relay or fuse to operate.

These alarms listed in the notification list can be located by double-clicking lines in thelist.

132

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 133: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Performing protection analysis11.3.4.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license is required for a protectionanalysis.

The Protection analysis and Earth-fault Protection com-mands are available only if the feeder is not connected to aloop, or the feeding substation is not fed from several sources.

Analyzing protection in a given fault location

To analyze protection in a given fault location:

1. Right-click the fault in the main network window.2. Select Protection Analysis from the shortcut menu.

Protection coordination is analyzed on the basis of fault calculations.

Analyzing the earth-fault protection

To analyze the earth-fault protection:

1. Right-click the network line in the main network window.2. Select Earth-fault Protection from the shortcut menu

The earth-fault protection coordination is analyzed on the basis of fault calculations.

Analyzing the protection of a meshed network

To perform the protection analysis of meshed network:

1. Select Analyze > Meshed Network Short Circuit Currents.2. Select the location (node) of the short-circuit.

The short-circuit currents in the corresponding isolated island are calculated. In otherislands, the short-circuit currents are zero. You can check the fault currents flowingthrough, for example, the relayed feeding of the loop where the fault is. At the sametime, the maximum 3-phase and 2-phase short-circuit currents for each line section inthe island are calculated for the use of the fault location and protection analysis functions.

133

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 134: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Showing protection analysis results of given fault location11.3.5.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license is required for a protectionanalysis.

The protection analysis dialog shows the operation data for all relays detecting a faultcurrent in a given fault location. The application analyzes all relays and fuses towardsthe substation in a radial-operated network. In a meshed network, the application analyzesall relays which have detected a fault current.

The operation data for all relays and fuses is shown in the following table:

Table 11.3.5-1 Operation data for all relays and fusesLow voltage networksEarthed medium voltage net-

worksMedium voltage networks

Type of the protection (relay orfuse)

Type of the protection (relay orfuse)

Type of the protection (relay orfuse)

Relay or fuse codeRelay or fuse codeRelay or fuse code

3-phase short-circuit current inthe voltage level of device

3-phase short-circuit current inthe voltage level of device(Sc3Ph)

Operation time for 3-phaseshort-circuit current

Operation time for 3-phaseshort-circuit current

2-phase short-circuit current inthe voltage level of device

2-phase short-circuit current inthe voltage level of device

Operation time for 2-phaseshort-circuit current

Operation time for 2-phaseshort-circuit current

LockingsLockings

1-phase short-circuit current1-phase short-circuit current

Operation time for 1-phaseshort-circuit current

Operation time for 1-phaseshort-circuit current

Short-circuit capacityShort-circuit capacity

Short-circuit detectionShort-circuit detection

The short-circuit capacity is the percentage ratio of a 3-phase short-circuit current overthe calculated maximum permissible short-circuit current for the conductor. It is calculatedusing the equivalent duration of the short-circuit and the short-circuit capacity (1 s) ofthe conductor. If the relative value is less than 100%, the conductor can stand the short-circuit. If the relay is not tripping, dashed lines are appearing here.

Short-circuit detection means the percentage ratio between 2-phase short-circuit currentand the relay setting. If the value is higher than 100%, the relay will trip.

134

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 135: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

If the operation data dialog contains "-" marks, the valuecannot be calculated or it is infinite.

Select the relay and click Relay Settings to show the relay settings of an appropriaterelay. If you select a fuse and click Data Form, the free data form of the fuse is opened.

Select a relay or fuse and click Show Area to color the area protected with the appropriaterelay with the warning color in the main network window. The function is available inradial operated networks.

Select a relay or fuse and click Locate to show the relay or fuse with its symbol in themain network window.

Showing earth-fault protection analysis results11.3.6.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license is required for a protectionanalysis.

The earth-fault protection analysis dialog contains the operation data for all feeders. Theearth-fault protection analysis of DMS 600 WS can analyze isolated, neutral compensatedand resonant-earthed networks.

Table 11.3.6-1 Operation data for all feedersMedium voltage networks

Feeder name

Total length of the feeder (km)

Total length of bare overhead line (km)

Total length of the insulated overhead line (km)

Total length of the underground cable (km)

Share of each feeder in the total earth-fault current, when the fault resistance is 0Ω.

Protective relay energized by zero sequence current at the supply point when the fault resistanceis 0Ω.

Share of each feeder of the total earth-fault current, when the fault resistance is the same as inthe settings.

Protective relay energized by zero sequence current at the supply point when the fault resistanceis the same as in the settings.

Lowest neutral point voltage during the fault (kV)

Protective relay’s voltage setting (kV)

135

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 136: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Medium voltage networks

Protective relay’s current setting (A)

Mechanical protective relay’s active power setting (kW)

Mechanical protective relay’s reactive power setting (kVar)

Protective relay’s time delay setting (s)

Percentage ratio between the neutral point voltage and the voltage setting of a relay. If the valueis higher than 100%, the relay will trip. (%)

Percentage ratio of the zero sequence current and the current setting of a relay. If the value ishigher than 100%, the relay will trip. (%)

Percentage ratio of the feeder powers and mechanical protective relay’s power settings. If thevalue is higher than 100%, the relay will trip. (%)

Network and protection analysis using forecasted loads11.4.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license is required for a protectionanalysis.

DMS 600 SA maintains load forecasts for MV/LV stations as a background process.The network can be analyzed using the load forecasts in the following order:1. Select Analyze > Forecast. DMS 600 WS moves automatically to the Simulation

Mode.2. Define the forecast parameters.

Table 11.4-1 Forecast parametersNoteFunction:Option or Field:

The default is 1 hour.Network and protection ana-lysis using the load forecast isstarted from the present timeand calculated for the next0…168 hours.

From present

Hours (0…168)

The default is the present dayand hour.

Network and protection ana-lysis using the load forecast isstarted from the given day ofthe week and hour, and calcu-lated for the next 0…23 hours.

Weekday and hour

Day of the week

Hour (0…23)

The default values for theanimation are 10 and 0.

Network and protection ana-lysis is performed using loadforecast for each hour and theresults are shown automaticallyafter a defined hour and timedelay (1…10 s).

Animation

Last hour of animation

Delay in animation (1…10 s)

136

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 137: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

NoteFunction:Option or Field:

A dialog box is used to con-tinue or stop the load forecast-ing.

Network and protection ana-lysis shows the results onehour at the time.

Manual

When the load forecast is completed, the system returns to the State Monitoring Mode.

Network and protection analysis using simulated data11.5.

General about simulation11.5.1.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license is required for a protectionanalysis.

To enter DMS 600 WS to Simulation Mode, select Analyze > Simulation. The menuchanges to Analyze > Back to State Monitoring. DMS 600 WS is not connected toprocess through MicroSCADA. A blinking text "Simulation" is displayed in the secondpane of status bar. Time is not displayed in the third pane of the status bar.

After switching to Simulation Mode, a network and protection analysis can be executedusing:• Simulated switching state.• Simulated network analysis settings.• Simulated protection analysis settings.• Simulated relay settings data.• Simulated voltage value in feeding substations• Defined date and time.

The change in network and/or switching state data in Simulation Mode automaticallyrecalculates the network and updates the network topology on the screen (if not disabledin the general settings. For more information about general settings, see 7.4.1, Definingautomatic function settings). The analysis is executed automatically only for radialfeeders. In the Simulation Mode the meshed network analysis must be started by selectingAnalyze > Meshed Network Analysis.

When the automatic updating of radial feeders is not enabled, the Analyze > Network& Protection command can be used to execute the network and protection analysis.

The network and protection analysis results for simulated states are showed in the sameway as in State Monitoring Mode (for more information, see 11.2.7, Showing networkanalysis result).

137

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 138: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Any modification made in Simulation Mode is not saved tothe real time database; it is just a temporary setting for the useof workstation.

Changing switching state11.5.2.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license is required for a protectionanalysis.

The changing of switching states for simulation purposes is done using the Switch Statusand Conductor State dialog boxes in DMS 600 WS. The change of state occurs in thesame way as in the State Monitoring Mode with the exception that the station and controlpictures of MicroSCADA are not used (for more information about state changes in StateMonitoring Mode, see 9.2.1, General about switching states).

The topology is automatically updated after every change in a switch state (if not disabledin the settings, for more information about general settings, see 7.4.1, Defining automaticfunction settings).

If automatic updating is not functioning:• Select Analyze > Refresh Topology to update the network topology.• Select Analyze > Network & Protection to update the network and protection

analysis results after changes in switching states.

You can save the switching state of the reorganized network by selecting File > SaveSwitching State. The command opens a dialog box in which you can give a filenameand then save the switching state on the screen into this file. You can open the list ofsaved switching state files by selecting File > Read Switching State. After you selecta file, the system loads this switching state into the network model of the workstation.If DMS 600 WS is not in Simulation Mode, it enters the mode after a query.

Changing network analysis settings11.5.3.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license is required for a protectionanalysis.

To change the network analysis settings for a simulation in the Simulation Mode:1. Select Settings > General to change the network analysis.

138

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 139: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

2. Click the Network Analysis tab. Use the scrolling arrows to scroll the tabs if needed.3. Define the load calculation settings, see 7.6.3, Load calculation settings.4. Insert the value for conductor temperatures. Conductor temperature in load current

calculation defines the operation temperature for the line resistance calculationduring the load current calculation. Conductor temperature in fault current cal-culation defines the operation temperature for the calculation of conductor resistanceduring the network analysis. The value must be between 0 ... + 400°C. Equivalenttemperature for the calculation of conductor resistance is defined in the MV conductordata form.

Changing protection analysis settings11.5.4.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license is required for a protectionanalysis.

To define the protection analysis settings for a simulation in Simulation Mode:1. Select Settings > General.2. Click the Protection tab. Use the scrolling arrows to scroll the tabs if needed.3. Insert a value for the Earth-fault resistance (ohm) field which defines the earth-

fault resistance used in the protection analysis. The default value is 500 ohm.4. Define the selectivity analysis settings using the boxes described in 7.6.4, Protection

analysis settings.5. Define the LV network protection that is analyzed against the fault current/fuse or

operation time by selecting the appropriate option.6. If the operation time based analysis is checked, define the maximum operation time

for the fuse.

Changing relay settings11.5.5.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license is required for network andprotection analysis.

To define the protection relay settings for the simulation in Simulation Mode:1. Open the relay data dialog:

• Right-click the node or line section in the main network window and selectRelay from the shortcut menu.

• Click an object in a network window or network diagram or select Rrght-clickthe node or line section in the main network window and select Node Inform-

139

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 140: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

ation from the shortcut menu. Then click Relay to see the relay data dialog ofthe corresponding feeder.

• Perform the protection analysis. Select the relay and click Relay Settings toshow the relay settings of the appropriate relay. If you select a fuse and clickData Form, the free data form of the fuse is opened.

2. Insert relay data to each protection unit: overcurrent, earth-fault and reclosing. Formore information about relay settings, see System Administration.

3. Select the relay settings data source. The relay settings of the relay types SPACOMand RED 500 in the protection analysis can also be obtained via MicroSCADA andare stored to the network database. The data source for all relays in Simulation Modecan be changed between the network model and relay active settings via Micro-SCADA by selecting File > Relay Data Source > Network Model and File > RelayData Source > Relay. The loaded settings are used for all protection analysis calcu-lations.

Relay setting will be restored when returning back to StateMonitoring Mode.

Changing voltage value in feeding substations11.5.6.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license is required for a network ana-lysis.

To enable this function, you must first create a new voltage measurement point andconnect it to a substation node.

Now, when clicking the measurement point while operating in simulation mode, a sep-arate dialog should be opened instead of the Generic form for measurement. This dialogis utilized only to give a new voltage value for the measurement and, thus, for the sub-station busbar. The given voltage value is used as the feeding voltage in load flow calcu-lations.

The actual voltage value for the measurement point (the valueretrieved from SCADA) will be restored when returning backto State monitoring mode.

140

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 141: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Changing power values to motors11.5.7.

This chapter does not apply to DMS 600 (Base) license. Net-work Analysis license is required for network analysis.

To enable this function, you must first create a new current measurement, a new activepower measurement (P), or a new reactive power measurement (Q) point and connectto a motor node.

To change the power values:1. Click the measurement point in simulation mode.2. Give new power values for the measurement of the motor node.

The change in motor measurement data affects the load flow calculation results in theradial calculation of the WS.

The actual power value for the measurement point (i.e. thevalue retrieved from SCADA) must be restored when returningback to State monitoring mode.

Changing power values to generators11.5.8.

This chapter does not apply to DMS 600 (Base) license. Net-work Analysis license is required for network analysis.

To enable this function, you must first create a new current measurement, a new activepower measurement (P), or a new reactive power measurement (Q) point and connectto a generator node that is connected to a Generator Block Transformer.

To change the power values:1. Click the measurement point in simulation mode.2. Give new power values for the measurement of the generator node.

The change in generator measurement data affects the meshed network load flow calcu-lation results in the loop calculation of the WS.

The actual power value for the measurement point (i.e. thevalue retrieved from SCADA) must be restored when returningback to State monitoring mode.

141

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 142: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Setting date and time for network analysis11.5.9.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license is required for a network ana-lysis.

Network analysis in DMS 600 WS is normally used to analyze the real time networkstate for the most effective and safe use of the network. When using load curves, DMS600 WS can also simulate the network analysis using the defined date and time. Theload flow in DMS 600 WS is calculated using the load information of defined date andtime according to the used load curves.

To define the date and time for network analysis:1. Select Analyze > Set Calculation Time. The dialog opens and shows the calendar

with the defined date and fields with the defined time. The default is the currentdate and time. The current date is shown in red. The defined date is shown in blue.

2. Select the date from the calendar with the mouse. Browse months with the arrowbuttons or click the month name and select the desired month. Change the year bybrowsing the months or click the year and insert the desired year.

3. Insert the exact time of calculation to the Time(hh:mm) fields.4. Click Set calculation time to take the date and time into use and close the dialog.

If DMS 600 WS is not in Simulation Mode, it is changed to this state. At the sametime the load data of the defined time is loaded and the network analysis is performedwith the new load data.

Select Analyze > Back to State Monitoring or click Use present time in the Set calcu-lation time dialog to take the current date and time into use and calculate the networkanalysis with the current load data. DMS 600 WS changes back to State MonitoringMode. The Use present time button does not change the mode back to State MonitoringMode if the mode has been Simulation Mode already before setting the time.

Cancel all definitions by closing the dialog with the button in the upper right corner.

142

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 143: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Fault management12.

General about fault management12.1.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault management.

The main functions of MV fault management are:1. Fault location2. Sending of GSM messages to important customers3. Fault isolation and restoration planning4. Execution of the planned switching sequences5. Fault reporting (for more information about fault reporting, see 14.4.1, General

about reporting fault and maintenance outages)6. Fault archiving (for more information about fault archiving, see 14.6, Archiving

outage data)

Several medium voltage faults can be managed at the same time with fault management.Automatic fault isolation and restoration handles one fault at a time.

DMS 600 WS contains the manual management of low voltage network faults (for moreinformation about LV fault management, see 12.11, Management of LV outage).

General progress of the MV fault management12.2.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault management.

The progression of fault clearance depends on the use of the automatic fault isolationand restoration function and the type of fault.

A new fault causes automatic zooming into the area of the faulted feeder. Other simul-taneous faults are not zoomed, but the faults are processed in the background (for moreinformation about automatic zooming, see 7.4.1, Defining automatic function settings).

Fault management starts with fault location (for more information about fault location,see 12.5.1, General about fault location). After fault location, a GSM message about theoutage can be sent to important customers automatically or manually. The default valuesused in the message are based on the active fault and possible reconfiguration. The defaultGSM message is sent to customers without supply.

143

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 144: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

If DMS 600 WS is in the Automatic Fault Isolation and Restoration Mode and the faultis definitely located during the fault location function, the isolation and restorationplanning is started automatically. If the automatic function is not in use or the fault cannotbe located definitely, the isolation and restoration planning can be started manually afterthe location of the fault (for more information about setting the fault location manually,see 12.7.1, Selection of active fault).

After the fault isolation and restoration planning, DMS 600 WS can execute the plannedswitching sequence. The execution is automatic or manual, depending on the functionsettings (for more information about the execution of fault isolation and restoration, see12.6.2.1, General about automatic fault isolation and restoration and 12.6.3, Generalabout manual fault isolation and restoration). After the fault is repaired, the fault data issaved to the fault archive (for more information about archiving, see 14.4.1, Generalabout reporting fault and maintenance outages).

Changing to automatic fault isolation and restorationmode

12.3.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license with Automatic Restoration subli-cense is required for fault management.

The administrator defines the DMS 600 WS workstation for automatic fault isolationand restoration.

Select Fault > Start Automatic Fault Isolation to swithc the workstation to AutomaticFault Isolation and Restoration Mode (for more information about settings for automaticfault isolation, see System Administration).

Click Stop Auto Operation Mode to stop the automatic fault isolation and restorationfunction.

All menu functions of the workstation are disabled in thismode. The mouse can be used only for zooming and panning.Other DMS 600 WS workstation can be used normally.

Managing fault handling areas12.4.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault management.

144

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 145: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Each operator is able to filter faults so that they appear automatically only for selectedarea(s) in the Fault Management dialog.

The area can be defined for each switching device separately with the Area functionality(for more information about creating fault handling areas, see System Administration).

To open the Fault Management dialog, select Fault > Fault Handling Areas.

In the Fault Management dialog, you can manage the fault areas as follows:

• To select the fault handling area, click it in the list, or click Select All.• To save the selected area(s) to be used as a default area at the next login, click Save

as default.• To view the default areas by the username, click Restore default Areas.• To enable fault filtering according to selected areas, click OK.

Fault location12.5.

General about fault location12.5.1.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault management.

The fault location function deals with permanent feeder faults occurring in radial operated,neutral isolated, compensated or neutral earthed distribution networks. In meshed net-works, the fault location works only if the faulted feeder or an opened circuit breaker isfeeding a radial branch. Busbar faults (no feeder for an opened circuit breaker) are locatedin the same way as radial feeder faults.

If there are problems with the MicroSCADA connection, the fault location simulationcan also be used for real faults as described in 12.8.6, Locating real faults in MicroSCADAdisconnection.

Permanent faults in a distribution network are detected by relays connected to Micro-SCADA. When a permanent fault has occurred, the required fault data collected byMicroSCADA is automatically sent to DMS 600 WS. The states of the remotely readablefault detectors are obtained from MicroSCADA.

After that, DMS 600 WS automatically starts the fault location function and shows thepresent topology of the network. DMS 600 WS analyzes the fault data and inferencesthe most likely fault locations. All line sections that are possible fault locations basedon the fault distance calculation are shown on the screen using the alarm color.

145

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 146: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Possible fault locations along the feeder in which a fault has occurred are determined onthe basis of the following information:• Fault distance calculation (based on sequence representation, if necessary).• Fault detector data.• Type of line sections (underground cable/overhead line).• Overload conditions for distribution transformers and cables.

The fault location of short-circuits and earth-faults based on the transferred fault detectordata can be used in any kinds of networks. However, fault location based only on faultdetectors can locate a fault to a feeder zone determined by fault detectors not accuratelyto a point along feeder.

The fault distance calculation requires fault current or impedance registration, for example,for relays and data transfer from process via MicroSCADA. The fault data needed forthe fault location function of DMS 600 WS can be automatically transferred fromMicroSCADA. Only fault detector data that is read on-site has to be updated manuallyin DMS 600 WS (for more information about fault detectors read on-site, see12.5.3, Management of on-site readable fault detector state).

If data is missing and the fault location cannot be calculated, the faulted feeder is stilldisplayed on the screen with zooming, and the Fault Management dialog indicates anew fault.

For more information about fault location parameters, see 12.5.1, General about faultlocation and System Overview.

Fault distance calculation12.5.2.

Fault distance calculations can use the following methods:1. Magnitude of short circuit current (A)2. Impedance (reactance) from the relay to the fault location3. Distance (meters) from the relay to the fault location

The method using current magnitude can calculate the fault distance in case of 2- or 3-phase short-circuits and 1-phase or 2-phase to earth short-circuits in earthed networks.However, earth short circuits cannot be located if the substation is fed from a loop becausethe feeding impedance components cannot be determined. In neutral isolated or com-pensated networks, 1-phase to earth short-circuits cannot be located using the currentmagnitude method.

The method using reactance from the relay to the fault location can be used in any kindsof networks. The distance to fault can also be calculated in case of 1-phase to earth faultsin neutral isolated networks. In these cases the given reactance is the sum of positiveand zero sequence reactances. Normally the accuracy of available reactance measurementis lower, especially in compensated networks.

146

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 147: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

The method using distance from the relay to the fault location can be used in any kindof a network. The fault location is calculated directly from the lengths of the sections inthe network model.

Management of on-site readable fault detector state12.5.3.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault management.

The states of the remote readable fault detectors are obtained from MicroSCADA butthe on-site readable detectors are managed by the user interface of DMS 600 WS.

If there are any faults under fault management in DMS 600WS, a change of the fault detector state also causes a new faultlocation function for the active fault to be run again using thenew fault detector information.

To change the operational state of detectors:1. Click a fault detector in the network window or on the diagram to open the Fault

detector data form.2. Change the operational state of an on-site readable detector by selecting Operated

or Non-operated. The network window is updated and a message sent to all instancesof DMS 600 WS to read the new fault detector state from the DMS 600 database.The fault location function for the active fault is run again using the new fault detectorinformation.

The operational time of an on-site readable detector is managed by DMS 600 WS, sothat the operational time is always the present time relating to the selection of a state.

If DMS 600 WS is in Simulation Mode (for example, while studying an old repairedfault), you are asked if you want to store the update permanently in the real time DMS600 database, too. The selection of a state always affects the network model and the faultfile under simulation.

Progress of the fault location12.5.4.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault management.

MicroSCADA detects a fault and switches to DMS 600 SA and DMS 600 WS. WhenDMS 600 WS receives information of a new fault, it runs the fault location function. For

147

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 148: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

more information about settings, see 7.4.1, Defining automatic function settings. Whenthe fault location function is running, the user interface of DMS 600 WS contains twonetwork windows. The main network window is automatically zoomed to the feeder inwhich a fault has occurred. The feeders are shown according to the switching state (thefeeder that has been faulted is shown with an unsupplied color) and possible faulted linesections are shown with an alarm color in the main network window. Other feeders areshown according to the switching state of the feeders. The bottom-right corner includesthe resizable Fault Management dialog box which is the basic dialog box for gettinginformation on faults.

If the fault location function of DMS 600 WS cannot locate the fault definitely ("Faultnot located" text is visible in the dialog), the management of the fault is continued withthe functions of the Fault Management dialog (for more information about fault man-agement, see 12.7.1, Selection of active fault).

If DMS 600 WS is in the Automatic Fault Isolation and Restoration Mode, the FaultManagement dialog is disabled and the Automatic Operation Mode Running dialogis active. For more information about automatic fault isolation and restoration, see12.6.1, General about fault isolation.

Fault isolation and restoration12.6.

General about fault isolation12.6.1.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license with the Restoration Support sub-license is required for fault management.

The fault isolation and restoration planning necessitate the definition of fault locations(for more information about fault location, see 12.5.1, General about fault location).Fault location can be based on the automatic fault location function or the faulted zonecan be defined manually. The definition of the faulted zone for the isolation and restorationplanning is done automatically, if the probability of the fault in some remotely controlledzone is larger than the lower limit of the faulted zone and the probability of a fault inother zones is smaller than the upper limit of the other zones (for more information aboutfaulted zone parameters, see 7.8.2.3, Faulted zone location settings).

Fault isolation and restoration planning generates the switching sequence that takes intoaccount the technical constraints of the network and the protection demands. Voltagedrop, short-circuit detection, earth-fault detection, short-circuit capacity and load levelfor each line section included in the planning are checked (for more information aboutswitching planning parameters, see 7.8.3, Switching planning settings).

148

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 149: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Automatic fault isolation and restoration12.6.2.

General about automatic fault isolation and restoration12.6.2.1.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license with the Automatic Restorationsublicense is required for automatic fault isolation and restor-ation.

During the automatic fault isolation and restoration process, the actions are shown in theAutomatic Operation Mode Running dialog. Automatic Fault Isolation and RestorationMode has five different states: Enabled, Pre delayed, Running, Post delayed and Inter-rupted.

If DMS 600 WS is in Automatic Fault Isolation and Restoration Mode, the functions inthe Fault Management dialog are used only to mark the repaired fault. However, if theDMS 600 WS cannot locate the fault definitely, the management of the fault is performedwith the functions of the Fault Management dialog. If you are using the same worksta-tion, the system assumes that Automatic Fault Isolation and Restoration Mode is quitted.The function can also be done with another DMS 600 WS workstation.

Automatic fault isolation and restoration is based on remotelycontrolled switches.

Performing automatic fault isolation and restoration12.6.2.2.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license with the Automatic Restorationsublicense is required for automatic fault isolation and restor-ation.

149

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 150: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

DMS_fault_management_a.jpg

Figure 12.6.2.2-1 The flow of the fault management in the Automatic Fault Isolation andRestoration Mode

After Automatic Fault Isolation and Restoration Mode detects a new fault:1. DMS 600 WS receives information of a new fault, waits for a delay (defined by

Fault Location Start Delay (s) in DMS 600 NE) and runs the fault location functionautomatically.

2. If DMS 600 WS cannot locate the fault definitely, the management of the fault mustbe continued manually. For more information about manual fault management, see12.6.3, General about manual fault isolation and restoration. If DMS 600 WS canlocate the fault definitely to a remotely controlled zone (or a feeder without remotelyoperated switches), DMS 600 WS automatically starts the fault isolation and restor-ation planning. The result of the planning is the switching sequence.

3. The generated switching sequence is automatically executed. After the startup ofthe automatic sequence, DMS 600 WS presents the status the Automatic sequencerunning. If the whole switching sequence was successful, DMS 600 WS waits forthe delay (defined by Switching State Update Delay (s) in DMS 600 NE) andchecks that the current switching state is similar to the switching sequence plan.Only if no errors occur during the sequence, and the two switching states are similar,DMS 600 WS continues normally and may start another restoration sequence if anew fault appears, otherwise the status will be changed to "Automatic fault isolation

150

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 151: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

mode interrupted". In the latter case, DMS 600 WS cannot start another sequencebefore manual resetting by the Reset button in the Automatic Operation ModeRunning dialog. For more information about processing the switching sequence,see System Administration.

4. After the successful execution of the switching sequence, the fault must be markedas repaired in the Fault Management dialog. If you are using the same workstation,the system assumes Automatic Fault Isolation and Restoration Mode is quitted. Thefunction can also be done with another DMS 600 WS workstation. Click Repairedin the Fault Management dialog to indicate that the active fault has been repaired.

General about manual fault isolation and restoration12.6.3.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license with the Restoration Support sub-license is required for manual fault isolation and restoration.

If the automatic fault isolation and restoration functionality is not switched on, theoperator performs fault isolation and restoration switching actions.

In addition, if DMS 600 WS is in Automatic Fault Isolation and Restoration Mode butthe automatic fault location fails to define the exact faulted zone, isolation and restorationplanning can be manually started after the definition of the faulted zone. Automatic FaultIsolation and Restoration Mode will quit in the automatic DMS 600 WS workstation.The function must be done with some other DMS 600 WS workstation.

For more information about manual fault isolation and restoration, see 12.7.5, Definingthe faulted zone manually and 12.7.6, Performing manual fault isolation and restoration.

151

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 152: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

DMS_manual_fault_management_a.jpg

Figure 12.6.3-1  The flow of the fault management in the Manual Fault Isolation and RestorationMode

Manual MV fault management12.7.

Selection of active fault12.7.1.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault management.

You must quit Automatic fault isolation and restoration mode by clicking Reset in theAutomatic Operation Mode Running dialog before starting manual fault management.

Take the responsibility for the fault by clicking Responsibility before you perform anyother actions on the active fault.

152

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 153: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

The new active fault is shown in the Fault Management dialog after the fault location(if Automatic Fault Isolation and Restoration Mode is not in use). The dialog includesa list of all faults under fault management. The dialog is displayed as long as there areunrepaired faults in the list and the user cannot close the dialog before all faults arerepaired.

To open the list of all faults, select Fault > All. The latest fault is at the top. To start thefault location of that fault, select the fault from the list, and click OK.

The list of faults includes some basic information.

Table 12.7.1-1 Basic information in the list of faultsMode:Meaning:Prefix:

State Monitoring Mode/FaultManagement

Unrepared faultNo prefix

Simulation ModeRepaired faultR

Simulation ModeArchived faultA

Simulation modeDemonstration faultS

Simulation modeReported faultRR/AR

Active faults are highlighted in the list. Select a fault to activate it. DMS 600 zoomes tothe new active fault and switches to Simulation Mode if necessary (for more informationabout fault location simulation, see 12.8.6, Locating real faults in MicroSCADA discon-nection.

If the selected fault is a fault in a substation or in a loopedconnection, the functions of the dialog box are limited (onlyresponding to repaired and viewing fault information).

Information about the active fault and fault location parameters12.7.2.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault management.

The fault data needed for location in DMS 600 WS is automatically transferred fromMicroSCADA. The administrator defines the fault location parameters. Informationabout active faults and fault location parameters is presented in the following table:

153

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 154: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Table 12.7.2-1 Information about the active fault and fault location parametersNoteFunction:Button:

This information can bechanged for simulation pur-poses. The functions behindthis button are described ingreater detail in 12.7.3.1, Basedata of fault.

Opens a separate dialog boxshowing detailed informationfor the active fault.

Fault Information

In the case of a real fault, thisis the default state.

Shows the network in its actualswitching state.

Faulted Feeder (switchingstate)

Switches the system to Simula-tion Mode. To return to the realtime switching state, clickFaulted Feeder (switchingstate).

Shows the switching state ofthe whole network just beforethe fault.

Faulted Feeder (snapshot)

Present a fault detector indica-tion with a warning color in thenetwork window.

Fault detector indication

For example:

Fault detector operations areincorrect.

Simultaneous faults along thefaulted feeder can be sup-posed.

Calculated fault distance doesnot match with the feeder.

Shows additional information.Info

The parameters can bechanged for simulation pur-poses.

Opens a dialog showing thefault location parameters.

Parameters

Fault information12.7.3.

Base data of fault12.7.3.1.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault management.

To view base data of a fault:1. In the Fault Management dialog, click Fault information.2. Select the Base data tab.

154

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 155: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

To locate the fault using the changed fault data in Simulation Mode, click Simulate (formore information about simulation, see 12.5.1, General about fault location).

To make actual changes to the fault data, click OK.

You must have the responsibility for the fault to be able toclick OK.

You can always retrieve the original values of the real fault from the fault file by clickingOriginal Values.

Table 12.7.3.1-1 Base dataNoteInformation:Field:

Shows the main substation, inwhich the fault exists.

Main substation

Shows the feeder (or trippedcircuit breaker), in which thefault exists.

Tripped CB/Faulted feeder

Shows the starting date of thefault.

Date

Shows the starting time of thefault.

Time

Defines the type of the fault tobe either a 2-phase or 3-phaseshort-circuit or a 1-phase or 2-phase earth short-circuit orearth-fault.

Type of fault

When the fault is reported,additional information is copiedto the corresponding field of afault report (for more informa-tion about fault reports, see14.4.8, Inserting additional dataof an outage).

Shows additional information.Additional

Fault status can be changed inthe Fault information dialog,or from the shortcut menu inthe fault list in the Fault Man-agement dialog (for moreinformation about defining codeinfo for fault status see SystemAdministration ).

Fault repairing statusState

155

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 156: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

NoteInformation:Field:

Fault repairing time can bechanged in the Fault informa-tion dialog, or from the shortcutmenu in the fault list in theFault Management dialog (formore information about definingcode info for the fault repairingtime see System Administra-tion).

Estimated fault repairing timeRepaired

Fault current data12.7.3.2.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault management.

To view fault current data:1. In the Fault Management dialog, click Fault information.2. Select the Fault current tab.

To locate the fault using the changed fault data in Simulation Mode, click Simulate (formore information about simulation, see 12.5.1, General about fault location).

To make actual changes to the fault data, click OK.

You must have the responsibility for the fault to be able toclick OK.

You can always retrieve the original values of the real fault from the fault file by clickingOriginal Values.

Table 12.7.3.2-1 Fault current dataNoteInformation:Field:

Defines if the fault current ismeasured with the busbar pro-tection bay.

Busbar protection bay

Defines if the fault current ismeasured with the feeder bay.

Feeder bay

Normally the final trip (aftersome autoreclosing) starts thefault location function and thelast measured value of theshort-circuit current is used inthe fault distance calculation.

Shows the fault current meas-ured before the fault by themeasuring unit under consider-ation.

Fault current (A)

156

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 157: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

NoteInformation:Field:

Shows the load current meas-ured before the fault by themeasuring unit under consider-ation.

Load current (A)

Click Fault Current Buffer to show the latest registered fault current values of ameasuring relay, if the relay includes such a register buffer. The fault location with thefault current of the first circuit breaker opening can be simulated, see 12.8.3, Locatingreal fault with changed data.

Fault impedance data12.7.3.3.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault management.

To view fault impedance data:1. In the Fault Management dialog, click Fault information.2. Select the Fault impedance tab.

To locate the fault using the changed fault data in Simulation Mode, click Simulate (formore information about simulation, see 12.5.1, General about fault location).

To make actual changes to the fault data, click OK.

You must have the responsibility for the fault to be able toclick OK.

You can always retrieve the original values of the real fault from the fault file by clickingOriginal Values.

Table 12.7.3.3-1 Fault impedance dataNoteInformationField

See 7.8.2.5, Impedance-basedfault location settings and7.8.2.7, Impedance-basedearth fault location settings.

Shows the name of the imped-ance based on fault locationmethod. When information isgiven manually, the methodnames available in the list aredependent on the selected faulttype.

Name

Not in use at the moment,reserved for future use.

Shows the resistance ofregistered impedance(s) offault.

R (Ohm)

157

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 158: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

NoteInformationField

Shows the reactance ofregistered impedance(s) offault.

X (Ohm)

Distance data12.7.3.4.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault management.

To view distance data:

1. In the Fault Managment dialog, click Fault information.2. Select the Distance tab.

To locate the fault using the changed fault data in Simulation Mode, click Simulate (formore information about simulation, see 12.5.1, General about fault location).

To make actual changes to the fault data, click OK.

You must have the responsibility for the fault to be able toclick OK.

You can always retrieve the original values of the real fault from the fault file by clickingOriginal Values.

Table 12.7.3.4-1 Fault distance dataNoteInformationField

See 7.8.2.6, Distance-basedfault location settings.

Lists all fault distances.Distance

To add a new distance value, click New.

To change an existing distance value, click Edit. Change the value, and click OK.

To remove an existing distance, click Delete.

158

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 159: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Fault detector data12.7.3.5.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault management.

To view fault detector data:1. Click Fault information.2. Select the Fault detector tab.

To locate the fault using the changed fault data in Simulation Mode, click Simulate (formore information about simulation, see 12.5.1, General about fault location).

To make actual changes to the fault data, click OK.

You must have the responsibility for the fault to be able toclick OK.

You can always retrieve the original values of the real fault from the fault file by clickingOriginal Values.

Table 12.7.3.5-1 Fault detector dataNoteInformation:Field:

The indicated region of a faultdetector can be shown in thenetwork window with a warningcolor by double-clicking thefault detector.

Lists all the fault detectorswhich have been operatedduring the fault.

Operated fault detectors

Click Locate to show the selected fault detector in the network window with a warningcolor. Data form opens a data form of the selected fault detector. All fault detectorslists all fault detectors in the dialog.

Primary transformer data12.7.3.6.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault management.

To view primary transformer data:1. Click Fault information.2. Select the Primary transformer tab.

159

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 160: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

To locate the fault using the changed fault data in Simulation Mode, click Simulate (formore information about simulation, see 12.5.1, General about fault location).

To make actual changes to the fault data, click OK.

You must have the responsibility for the fault to be able toclick OK.

You can always retrieve the original values of the real fault from the fault file by clickingOriginal Values.

Table 12.7.3.6-1 Primary transformer dataNoteInformation:Field:

Shows the measured realpower value of the load justbefore the fault.

Real power (kVa)

Shows the measured reactivepower value of the load justbefore the fault.

Reactive power (kVar)

Feeding network data12.7.3.7.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault management.

To view feeding network data:1. Click Fault information.2. Select the Feeding network tab.

To locate the fault using the changed fault data in Simulation Mode, click Simulate (formore information about simulation, see 12.5.1, General about fault location).

To make actual changes to the fault data, click OK.

You must have the responsibility for the fault to be able toclick OK.

You can always retrieve the original values of the real fault from the fault file by clickingOriginal Values.

160

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 161: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Table 12.7.3.7-1 Feeding network dataNoteInformation:Field:

If you want to use alternativeswitching states in the feedingnetwork, different feeding net-work impedance values arerequired. See 12.8.3, Locatingreal fault with changed data

Shows the short-circuit resist-ance and reactance of thefeeding transmission networkand main transformer supplyingthe faulted feeder.

Feeding network and maintransformer (ohm):

Rk Xk

Rk2 Xk2

Rk0 Xk0

Information about possible fault locations for active fault12.7.4.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault management.

Table 12.7.4-1 Information about the fault locationsNoteFunction:Button:

Shows exact fault locationsbased on the calculated faultdistance by an arrow in thenetwork window.

Arrow for fault distance

Shows the remote operateddisconnector zone in which afault has been located (ordefined) with a warning color inthe network window.

Faulted remote zone

Shows the possible fault loca-tions with warning color in thenetwork window.

Fault distance

Shows the line sections indic-ated by the fault detectors withalarming color in the networkwindow.

Fault detector indication

The field group data is shownon the list of faults.

Opens a separate dialog boxfor editing the field group dataof the fault.

Field group

Click a zone in the dialog boxwith the left mouse button toshow the appropriate zone witha warning color in the networkwindow.

Opens a separate dialog boxthat includes the names ofremotely operated disconnectorzones in which a fault is pos-sible, and the likelihood thatthey may include the fault.

Remote Contr. Disc. Zones

161

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 162: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

NoteFunction:Button:

Click a zone in the dialog boxwith the left mouse button toshow the appropriate zone witha warning color in the networkwindow.

Opens a separate dialog boxincluding the names of the dis-connector zones in which afault is possible (including themanually operated disconnect-ors), and the likelihood thatthey may include the fault.

All Disconnector Zones

If the calculated fault distancematches the line section underconsideration, the line for thatsection includes two extra val-ues. The Dist1 row shows thedistance between the calcu-lated fault distance and theprevious switching device. TheDist2 row shows the distancebetween the calculated faultdistance and the feeding pointin the main station.

Click the line section in thedialog box to display theappropriate line section with awarning color in network win-dow. At the same time, anadditional window is opened toshow the fault location argu-ments for the line section underconsideration.

Opens a separate dialog boxshowing the line sections inwhich faults are possible inorder of possibility.

This function shows the previ-ous switching device (manuallyoperated disconnector,remotely operated disconnectoror circuit breaker) of each linesection.

Network Components

Defining the faulted zone manually12.7.5.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault management.

The definition of the faulted remote controlled zone during fault location has succeededif the state line of the Fault Management dialog contains the text "Fault definitely loc-ated". In that case, the fault has been located into the remotely operated zone or thefaulted feeder does not contain any remotely operated switches. Inside the zone therecan still be several alternative fault locations (sections). If the faulted remotely controlledzone cannot be defined, the text "Fault not located" is displayed. The faulted remotelycontrolled zone can be manually defined or undefined. Also the text "Fault locationfailed" can be presented if, for example, the faulted feeder is in a loop connection.

162

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 163: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

You must quit Automatic fault isolation and restoration modeby clicking Reset in the Automatic Operation Mode Run-ning dialog before defining the faulted zone manually.

To define the faulted zone:1. Define the fault location manually by clicking Remote contr. disc. zones in the

Fault Management dialog box.2. Select the faulted zone in the dialog box and click Set Faulted Zone to set the active

zone as a faulted zone for the isolation and restoration planning. The button changesinto Undo Setting. Use this button to remove the setting of the faulted zone.

Check the Faulted Remote Zone check box in the Fault Management dialog box toshow the remotely operated disconnector zone, in which a fault has been located, witha warning color in the network window.

Performing manual fault isolation and restoration12.7.6.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license with the Restoration Support sub-license is required for fault management.

To plan manual isolation and restoration:1. Click Restoration in the Fault Management dialog to manually start the isolation

and restoration planning of an active fault. The result of the isolation and restorationplanning is a switching sequence presented in the Restoration dialog.

2. Click Step to open the MicroSCADA control or station diagram of the first switch.If the MicroSCADA connection is not functioning, the DMS 600 WS dialog box isopened for performing the action and DMS 600 WS automatically switches toSimulation Mode.

3. Perform the switching action. The performed switching action is marked with theletter E at the beginning of the appropriate line in the switching sequence.

4. If a switching action causes automatic opening of the switch, quit the switchingsequence by clicking Close in the dialog box. Define the new faulted zone and per-form the isolation and restoration planning again in the changed switching state.

5. Repeat the steps 2 to 4.

The text in the status line of the Fault Management dialog changes to "Restored" afterall switching actions have been performed.

The manual isolation and restoration planning can be used as a tool for experimentalswitching planning. After observing that the first approximation failed (a switching actionof the switching sequence causes the switch to open automatically), the definition of the

163

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 164: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

faulted zone can be changed, and the isolation and restoration planning can be performedagain.

Setting the fault repaired12.7.7.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault management.

The fault cleared in the Automatic Fault Isolation and Restoration Mode must also bedefined as repaired with this function.

To define the fault as repaired after the reparation:1. Select the active fault.2. Click Repaired in the Fault Management dialog. If there are no more unrepaired

faults, DMS 600 WS returns to State Monitoring Mode, or, in other cases, showsthe next fault. If it is a demonstration fault or an old already repaired fault, removethe fault indication by clicking Repaired.

Fault location simulation12.8.

General about fault location simulation12.8.1.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault management.

Fault location simulation can be used to:• Locate real faults with changed fault information or fault location parameters.• Insert new real fault data and locate faults (especially if there are problems with the

MicroSCADA connection).• Demonstrate a fault for simulation purposes (for example, a fault cleared by the

protection relay's autoreclosing function can be studied afterward using the manuallyread values measured from the relay).

Creating a new fault for areas fed by a disconnector or MV fuse12.8.2.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault management.

164

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 165: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

To create a new fault for areas fed by a disconnector or an MV fuse, select Create Faultfrom the short cut menu of the switching device.

Create Fault command will appear in the short cut menu if the feeder, in which theswitching device is located, is not looped or meshed, and at least one side of theswitching component is powered.

Locating real fault with changed data12.8.3.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault management.

After MicroSCADA detects a new fault, the fault location function runs using the realfault data that is automatically transferred from MicroSCADA and the fault locationparameters defined by the administrator. To simulate a real fault, you can select it fromthe list of all faults.

Changing fault information12.8.4.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault management.

To change real fault data transferred from MicroSCADA:1. Click Fault information in the Fault Management dialog box. The Fault

information dialog box opens showing the detailed information on the active fault.For more information about fault data, see 12.7.3.1, Base data of fault.

2. Change the fault information. Here are some notes for the changing:Earth short-circuit faults can be selected only if the network is earthed.•

• In the case of a permanent fault and final tripping, which normally starts thefault location function, the last measured value of the short-circuit current isused as a default in the fault distance calculation. Generally, an autoreclosinghas preceded the final tripping. Therefore, the register also includes the measuredvalues relating to the autoreclosing operation. For simulating the fault locationwith the fault current of the first circuit breaker opening (that is, when the faultreally occurs), the correct value is selected from the buffer dialog box andwritten in the fault current field.

• Normally fault location uses the feeding network's short-circuit impedancevalues that are associated with the main transformers. To use alternativeswitching states in the feeding network, you need different feeding networkimpedance values. Alternative feeding network impedance values can be usedif they are defined (for more information about the definition of alternative

165

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 166: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

network impedance values, see System Administration). If the alternativeimpedance values are defined, the Fault information dialog contains theAlternatives box which presents the descriptions of the alternative feedingnetwork for the selected main substation and circuit breaker. Select the desiredalternative situation and the corresponding resistance and reactance values. Touse the values associated with the main transformers, select Default.

• If resistance or reactance values are changed manually during fault location,they can be saved to the fault file when the defined fault state is "repaired" (willbe prompted). These values cannot be saved at the fault simulation.

3. Click Simulation to locate the fault using the changed data.

You can always retrieve the original values of the real fault from the fault file by clickingOriginal Values.

Changing fault location parameters12.8.5.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault management.

To change real fault data:1. Click Parameters in the Fault Management dialog box. The Fault location

parameters dialog box opens and displays the defined fault location parameters(for more information about fault location parameters, see 12.5.1, General aboutfault location).

2. Change the fault location parameters.3. Click Simulate to locate the fault using the changed parameter data. DMS 600 WS

switches to Simulation mode.

Locating real faults in MicroSCADA disconnection12.8.6.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault management.

To insert new real fault data and locate the fault during MicroSCADA disconnection:1. Select Fault > New to open the Fault Information dialog box without any primary

fault information. For more information about fault data, see 12.7.3.1, Base data offault.

2. Insert the fault data. Here are some notes for the inserting:

166

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 167: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

The faulted feeder lists all the circuit breakers of the selected main station.•• The short-circuit impedance values for the feeding network and main transformer

are updated on the basis of the feeder selection.• The default value for a date and time is the current date and time.

3. Click OK to create a fault file and to run the fault location function for the newfault. DMS 600 WS switches to Simulation mode.

After reconnection to MicroSCADA, DMS 600 WS switches to State Monitoring modeand the real switching state data is read from MicroSCADA. The fault data is saved intothe fault file and can be used as a basis for fault archiving and outage reporting.

Demonstrating fault location12.8.7.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for fault management.

To demonstrate a fault:1. Select an existing fault using the fault list and click Fault information, or create a

new demonstrative fault by selecting Fault > New. For more information aboutfault data, see 12.7.3.1, Base data of fault.

2. Change or insert fault data.3. Click Simulate to locate the fault that uses the changed data. DMS 600 WS switches

to Simulation mode.

Manual sending of GSM message in fault case12.9.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The GSM Messages sublicense is required for GSM messages.

You can configure GSM messages to be sent automatically in fault cases (see7.4.2, Automatic GSM message settings in fault cases).

If automatic sending is not enabled, or the progressing fault clearance is able to give anestimation about the duration of the outage, you can send a GSM message manually.

To send a GSM message:1. Click SMS messages/Answering Machine in the Fault Management dialog. The

SMS messages dialog opens. The default values are based on the active fault andpossible reconfiguration. The default GSM message is focused on customers withoutsupply. The list of feeders and LV networks without supply is presented in the dialog.

2. Add or remove the feeders, LV networks or customers, to which the GSM messagewill be sent. Select first Selected Feeders, Selected LV networks or Selected

167

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 168: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Customers. Click Add or Remove and point the target in the network window (youcan select several targets by pressing the left mouse button and by painting an areain the network window). Customers can also be added to the list with the Send SMSmessage button in the Customer Search dialog.

3. Define also if you want to send the GSM message to all customers of the selectedfeeders or LV networks, or just to important customers.

4. Select Area, if needed.5. If the estimation about the duration of the outage is available, fill the data into the

dialog.6. The formulated GSM message is presented in the bottom of the dialog. The GSM

message is formulated in the following way (the standard parts are presented withcursive):"Failure at distribution of electricity at + text of the Area field. Fault clearing hasbeen started. OR "Distribution will be back today/tomorrow hh:mm.”An example:"Failure at distribution of electricity at north of Hometown. Fault clearing has beenstarted.” OR “Failure at distribution of electricity at north of Hometown. Distribu-tion will be back today 18:00.”

7. Click Send to send the GSM message.

Manual definition of telephone answering machinemessage in fault case

12.10.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Telephone Answering Machine sublicense is required fortelephone answering machine functions.

For more information about the manual definition of telephone answering machinemessage sending, see 8.18.1, General about telephone answering machine.

Management of LV outage12.11.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Low Voltage Network and the Outage Reporting andStatistics licenses are required for low voltage fault manage-ment.

All LV outages (fault and maintenance outages) are managed in the same way.

The customer normally notifies about a low voltage network fault. Maintenance outagedata is acquired from operation planning.

168

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 169: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

To save the outage information to DMS 600 WS:1. Select LV Network Outage Report from the shortcut opened by clicking the

MV/LV transformer or customer node in the network window, or click Create LVOutage Report in the Customer search dialog. The Outage dialog opens. Thedialog contains the following fields:

Table 12.11-1 Information in the Outage dialogNoteInformation:Field:

Automatically filled-in data. Theinformation depends on thestarting command.

Information about LV network,MV/LV transformer and cus-tomer

LV Network

Automatically filled-in data.Default is the current date andtime.

Starting date and time of theoutage.

Start

Ending time of outage.End

The number of breaks duringthe outage.

Breaks (pcs)

Defines if the outage is a faultor a maintenance outage.

Outage type

If the feeder is selected, theoutage is automatically exten-ded to all customers that arefed by the same LV networkfeeder.

If the LV network is selected,the outage is automaticallyextended to all customers inthe same LV network.

Defines the scope of the out-age to be a customer, a feederor a LV network.

Outage scope

2. Click OK. DMS 600 WS checks if there are previously saved outages with matchingtime for the same LV network. If matching outages are found, they are presentedwith a possibility to join the new outage to one of them or to confirm the creationof the new outage. Select the old fault or maintenance outage and click Join or New.After clicking Join, the Report Management dialog opens with the already insertedoutage data.

3. Click Additional Data to open the LV Network Outage Report dialog. If youwant to use free data form, check first the Use free data form. Insert availableoutage data. Click the Update button.

4. Click Outage areas. The Outage areas dialog opens. For more information aboutthe dialog, see 14.4.9.1, Viewing outage area data. Click OK.

5. Click Update in the Report Management dialog to save the information.6. Click Close.

After repairing an LV fault or concluding an LV maintenance outage, report the outagedata and save it to the LV outage archive (for more information about LV outagereporting, see 14.4.2, Reporting of LV network outages).

169

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 170: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Switching planning13.

General about switching planning13.1.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license with the Operation Planningsublicense is required for switching planning.

Switching planning functions require the Network Analysis license. The isolation andrestoration planning made during the fault management also requires the Fault Locationlicense.

The main functions of switching planning are:• Isolation and restoration planning can be used in experimental switching planning

(for more information about fault isolation and restoration planning, see12.6.1, General about fault isolation).

• Maintenance outage planning is used in the planning of switching actions that areneeded to disconnect line sections for outages and to restore supply after an outagewith as little disturbance to the customers as possible.

• Contingency analysis by stepping through predefined sequences. The sequencespresent major outage situations in the network. Measurement value adjustments ofload and generation points (motor and generator power changes) can be includedinto the sequences. Also Analyze Contingency commands can be used in thesequences, and if any violations are found in the network analyses, a report is gen-erated. The report can be set to contain both topology and calculation violations, oronly violations during the network calculation.

• Reconfiguration planning helps to find an optimal switching state with minimallosses in the existing load situation.

Automatic planning functions generate the switching sequence which informs about thetechnical constraints of the network and the protection demands. Voltage drop, short-circuit detection, earth-fault detection, short-circuit capacity and load level are checkedfor each line section included in the planning (for more information about switchingplanning parameters, see 7.8.3, Switching planning settings). In addition to automaticswitching planning, you can also create a switching sequence manually in DMS 600WS.

The switching sequence contains the opening and closing of switch devices, simulatedpower values to motors and generators if contingency analysis was used, and other actionsneeded during an outage (for more information about the data content of the switchingsequence, see 13.10.1, Plan data). You can modify, simulate and execute switchingsequences that are created manually or with the maintenance outage planning function.

170

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 171: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Performed maintenance outage data can be reported and archived (for more informationabout outage reporting, see 14.4.1, General about reporting fault and maintenance outages,14.4.2, Reporting of LV network outages and about archiving 14.6, Archiving outagedata).

Creating switching sequence13.2.

Automatic switching sequence creation13.2.1.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license with the Operation Planningsublicense is required for switching planning.

To create the switching sequence automatically:1. Select Operations > Start Switching Planning. The Switching Planning Para-

meters dialog box opens.2. Define the basic data of the outage via the dialog box. The dialog box contains the

following definitions:

Table 13.2.1-1 Basic data of an outageNoteFunction:Field:

The day can be selected usingthe drop down list. Default isthe present day.

Defines the day of the week forwhich the outage plan is cre-ated.

Day of the week

Default is the present hour.Defines the hour of the day forwhich the outage plan is cre-ated.

Hour of the day (0-23)

Default is 0.Defines in amperes (A) themaximum load current the dis-connector can break.

Required on-load capacity ofswitches

For more information on howto set the default value, see7.8.3, Switching planning set-tings.

The breaking capacity of theswitch is checked against thecurrent based on the load flowcalculation multiplied by a set-table parameter.

Calculated load current is usedfor checking on-load capacity

3. Select Operations > Outage Location to define the location of the outage in thenetwork window, network diagram or substation diagram. After a line section isselected, it is shown in red.

4. Select Operations > Create Sequence to start planning. DMS 600 WS automaticallyswitches to Switching Planning Mode. The Sequence Management dialog boxopens and presents the switching sequence including additional operations (for moreinformation about additional operations, see 13.12, Modifying switching operations).

171

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 172: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

During an outage the network is presented according to the switching state. Theoutage area is colored with the color of unsupplied lines. The network before andafter the outage area is colored according to the changed topology and the networkand protection analysis. To define the presentation of the network, select View >Coloring.

5. If necessary, modify the switching sequence using the function of the dialog box(for more information about dialog box functions, see 13.3, Modifying switchingsequence).

Select Operations > Stop Planning to return DMS 600 WS to State Monitoring Mode.

Manual switching sequence creation13.2.2.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license with the Operation Planningsublicense is required for switching planning.

To create a switching sequence manually:1. Select Operations > Switching Plan Management. The Switching Plan Manage-

ment dialog box opens.2. Select Contingency Analysis if you want to create a contingency analysis plan.

Change the power values of motors and generators if necessary. Any changes willbe saved to the switching sequence.

3. Click New Plan. The Sequence Management dialog box opens. DMS 600 WSswitches to Switching Planning Mode.

4. Insert the free text specification of the plan into the text box and your name into thePlanner field. The creation date and time is automatically the present time.

5. Create the switching sequence. Change the state of the switching devices and linesections graphically as described in 11.5.2, Changing switching stateand9.2.5, Changing switching state of line sections.

6. If necessary, modify the switching sequence using the function in the dialog box(for more information about dialog box functions, see 13.3, Modifying switchingsequence).

Click Close to close the Sequence Management dialog box. DMS 600 WS switches toState Monitoring Mode.

172

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 173: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Modifying switching sequence13.3.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license with the Operation Planningsublicense is required for switching planning.

To modify the existing switching sequence before or after its execution with the functionsin the Sequence Management/Contingency Analysis dialog box:1. Open the Switchings tab. Click Add in the Mode field. The mode selection affects

the availability of buttons and their functions.2. If necessary, insert new switching actions. Change the state of the switching devices

and line sections graphically as described in 9.2.4, Changing switching state ofswitches not connected to MicroSCADA and 9.2.5, Changing switching state ofline sections. The new switching action is entered last in the switching sequence.

3. To move the switching action in the sequence, select the action, click Move andpoint the action in the sequence over which the selected action will be moved.

4. Click Edit to edit the data of the switching action. Check the Implemented checkbox to mark the switching action as executed. The execution time stamp is also setin the Execution mode.

5. Click Additional Operation to add additional switching action into the switchingsequence (for more information about additional operation, see 13.12, Modifyingswitching operations).

6. Click Constant Operations to add constant operations (for more information aboutadditional operation, see 13.12, Modifying switching operations).

7. Click Restoration to add actions that are needed to restore the switching state tothe initial state. Actions will be added to the end of the plan.

8. Click Locate to show the location of selected action in the network window.9. Click Show Area to show the outage area in the network window.10. Click Remove to remove the selected switching action from the sequence.

Click Close to close the Sequence Management dialog box. DMS 600 WS switches toState Monitoring Mode.

Saving and copying existing switching sequence13.4.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license with the Operation Planningsublicense is required for switching planning.

Save the switching sequence by clicking Save. If the name of the plan is not given, youwill be prompted to fill in a file name for the plan.

173

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 174: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

In a redundant system the saved plan is duplicated to anotherfileserver only if the original directory is a fileserver directoryor a subdirectory. The plan is copied to a corresponding sub-directory on the other server.

Copy the existing switching sequence by selecting the sequence and clicking Make copyin the Sequence Management dialog box. All actions are returned to not-executed statewhen copying under another file name.

Modify the copy for future needs as described in 13.3, Modifying switching sequence.

Converting an existing switching sequence to aContingency Analysis sequence

13.5.

This chapter does not apply to DMS 600 (Base) license. Net-work Analysis license with Operation Planning sublicense isrequired for switching planning.

To save a switching sequence, click Save. You will be prompted to fill in a filename forthe plan. In a redundant system, the saved plan will be duplicated to another fileserveronly if the original directory is a fileserver directory or subdirectory. The plan is copiedto a corresponding directory on the other server.

To convert an existing switching sequence to a Contingency Analysis Sequence:1. Select the sequence you want to convert.2. Check the Contingency Analysis check box and click Create Contingency in the

Switching Plan Management / Contingency Analysis dialog box.

You can see all saved Contingency Analysis Sequence plans by checking the ContingencyAnalysis check box in the Switching Plan Management / Contingency Analysis dialogbox.

Simulating switching sequence13.6.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license with the Operation Planningsublicense is required for switching planning.

174

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 175: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

To simulate the existing switching sequence using functions in the Sequence Manage-ment dialog box:1. Click Simulation in the Mode frame.2. Click Step to perform one step of the switching sequence at a time. DMS 600 WS

simulates a topology analysis and a network and protection analysis during theswitching sequence by offering the possibility to examine the effect of everyswitching action. The letter S at the beginning of the switching action indicates thesimulated switching action.

3. Click Rewind to move the simulation to the top of the switching sequence.4. Click Execute selected to perform the selected action.5. Click Execute to selected to perform all actions from the beginning to selected one.6. Click Locate to show the location of selected action in the network window.7. Click Show Area to show outage area in the network window.

Click Close to close the Sequence Management dialog box. DMS 600 WS switches toState Monitoring Mode.

Simulating Contingency Analysis sequence13.7.

This chapter does not apply to DMS 600 (Base) license. Net-work Analysis license with Operation Planning sublicense isrequired for switching planning.

Select Contingency Analysis in the Switching Plan Management / ContingencyAnalysis dialog box, then open an existing Contingency Analysis sequence plan.

To simulate an existing Contingency Analysis sequence:1. Repeat steps 1 to 7 in 13.6, Simulating switching sequence.2. Click Contingency Analysis to run the whole contingency analysis sequence plan.

All the predefined switching operations, simulated power value changes to motorsand generators and Analyze Contingency commands will be run automatically. Thecontingency analysis results window opens after all operations have been executed.

Click Close to close the Sequence Management dialog box. DMS 600 WS switches toState Monitoring Mode.

Executing switching sequence13.8.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license with the Operation Planningsublicense is required for switching planning.

175

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 176: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

To execute an existing switching sequence with the functions in the Sequence Manage-ment dialog box:1. Click Execution in the Mode frame. If the Execution mode is selected for the first

time, select a responsible user in the Responsibility dialog box .2. Click Step to perform one step of the switching sequence at a time. If the switching

device is connected to MicroSCADA, the MicroSCADA control or station pictureis opened. In the picture you can change the switching state of the appropriateswitching device. If the switching device is not connected to MicroSCADA, thestate of the switch is changed automatically.The indication of the active operation is also forwarded if the switching action isperformed in some other way than by clicking Step (for example, by controllingthe switching device directly via the network window, or by selecting a menucommand).The letter E at the beginning and the time stamp at the end of the switching actionindicates that the switching action has been performed.

3. Click Execute selected to perform the selected action.4. If necessary, the switching sequence data can be changed afterwards, as described

in 13.3, Modifying switching sequence.

To ensure that outage reporting functions correctly, youmust modify unperformed switching actions to performedactions by checking the Implemented check box asdescribed in 13.3, Modifying switching sequence.

5. Save the executed switching sequence by clicking Save.6. Report the outage by clicking Report (for more information about outage reporting,

see 14.4.1, General about reporting fault and maintenance outages).7. Click Locate to show the location of selected action in the network window.8. Click Show Area to show the outage area in the network window.

Click Close to close the Sequence Management dialog box. DMS 600 WS switches toState Monitoring Mode.

Word documents13.9.

Managing Word documents13.9.1.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license with the Operation Planningsublicense is required for switching planning.

Document generation is based on Word document templates and codes used in them.If the Word document code <name> is defined for the base data item Name, and it has

176

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 177: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

the value "Disc_D2205_repl_Jan_2005", then all occurrences of the <name> code inthe document template will be replaced with the string "Disc_D2205_repl_Jan_2005"in the generated document (for more information on codes, see model document templatesswitching_plan_listing.dot, contingency_analysis_sequence_listing.dot and switch-ing_plan_customers.dot in the Data folder of the DMS 600 fileserver). For moreinformation, see 13.9.3, Document templates

To manage documents:1. Select the Documents tab in the Sequence Management dialog box.2. Select a document from the list box (for more information about documents

appearing in the list, see 13.9.2, Document settings).3. Click Update to create a new Word document file or to update an existing one.4. Click Open to open an existing Word document without updating it.5. Click Delete to delete a Word document.

Document settings13.9.2.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license with the Operation Planningsublicense is required for switching planning.

To modify document settings:1. Click Settings in the Sequence Management dialog box, or Advanced in the

Switching planning tab in the General Settings dialog box to open the SwitchingPlan Settings dialog.

2. Select the Documents tab in the Switching Plan Settings dialog box.3. Select the document Code from the dropdown list, or click New to add a new docu-

ment and give a code for it.4. Edit Filename (example format: '%s_CustomerList.doc', %s will be replaced with

the plan name when the generated document is saved) and Template file (for moreinformation about document templates, see 13.9.3, Document templates).

5. To delete a document, select it from the dropdown list and click Delete.6. Edit the Saving Folder of generated documents (this is common for all generated

documents)

Document templates13.9.3.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license with the Operation Planningsublicense is required for switching planning.

177

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 178: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Table 13.9.3-1 Predefined codes for documentsNoteFunction:Data Item:

Next '<' will be skipped<t>

Person name, used togetherwith the code of the field con-taining a person code.

<n>

Person contact, used togetherwith the code of the field con-taining a person code.

<c>

All codes and texts belongingto a switching action must beinside < and >. For example:

<sw>

<<code> <name>>

Start of the list of the switchoperations.

<sw>

Start of the list of the unsup-plied customers. Codes forcustomer listing will be takenfrom the names of the fields ofthe query SwitchingPlan-CustomerQuery

<cs>

All codes and texts belongingto a contingency analysis alarmmust be inside < and >.

Start of the list of the contin-gency analysis alarms

<ca>

List of unsupplied LV networks,separated by comma.

<lv>

List of codes of switchingdevices bordering interruptionarea, separated by comma.

<bswc>

List of names of switchingdevices bordering interruptionarea, separated by comma.

<bswn>

Modifying data content of switching plans13.10.

Plan data13.10.1.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license with the Operation Planningsublicense is required for switching planning.

178

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 179: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

To edit plan data items:1. Click Settings in the Sequence Management dialog box, or Advanced in the

Switching planning tab in the General Settings dialog box to open the SwitchingPlan Settings dialog.

2. Select the Base data tab in the Switching Plan Settings dialog box.3. Select the code of the item from the Code dropdown list, or click New and give a

code for a new item.4. Edit the Label and Word document codes of the item. Label is used in the base

data list to describe an item (to enable language support, use language strings fromthe language database, for more information about language support, see Appendix8, Localization of DMS 600, in System Administration ). Word Document codesare used in document generation (for more information about documents, see13.9.1, Managing Word documents).

5. To delete a data item, select the code of the item from the Code dropdown list, andclick Delete. Default items cannot be deleted.

To edit person data:1. Click Settings in the Sequence Management dialog box, or Advanced in the

Switching planning tab in the General Settings dialog box to open the SwitchingPlan Settings dialog.

2. Select the Person data tab in the Switching Plan Settings dialog box.3. Select the Code of the person from the dropdown list, or click New and give a code

for a new person.4. Edit Name and Contact data of the person.5. To delete person data select the Code of the person from the dropdown list, and

click Delete. Person data is deleted only from settings, not from the plan data.

To edit the appearance and functionality of the base data list:1. Click Settings in the Sequence Management dialog box, or Advanced in the

Switching planning tab in the General Settings dialog box to open the SwitchingPlan Settings dialog.

2. Select the Base data order tab in the Switching Plan Settings dialog box.3. Select a row from base data list to be edited, or select location in the base data list

for a new item (a new item will be added the selected item), and click New buttonto add a new row.

4. Select the code of the data item from the topmost drop down lists (each row in thebase data list is divided into three fields, and the data content of each field can beselected independently).

5. Select functionality for each field from the undermost drop down lists.6. To move a row upwards or downwards in the list, select it and click Move up or

Move down button.7. To delete a row, select it from the base data list and click Delete.

179

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 180: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Table 13.10.1-1 Default Plan dataNoteFunction:Data Item:

The plan will be saved usingthis name as the filename. Ifnot defined when the plan issaved, the filename is promp-ted and updated to this field.

Name of the planName

Do not allow editing thisConsecutive number of theplans

Number

Automatically filledPerson who created the planDesigner

Automatically filledCreation time of the planDesigntime

Automatically updatedSaving time of the planChangedtime

Automatically filled when youclick the Checked box

Person who approved the planInspector

Automatically filled when youclick the Checked box

Inspectiontime

Automatically filled when theExecution mode is clicked forthe first time (if not definedmanually)

Person who is responsible forperforming switching actions

Responsible

Planned starting time of inter-ruption

Starttime

Planned ending time of interrup-tion

Endtime

This field is used by the largetext box on the Base data tab

Additional notesComment

Table 13.10.1-2 Plan data functionalityNoteFunction:Type:

Free text in data base listText

Changes are discarded if veri-fication has failed

Verifies text as integer numberInteger

Changes are discarded if veri-fication has failed

Verifies text as decimal numberDecimal

Changes are discarded if veri-fication has failed

Verifies text as date time valueDate

Not editableShows the label text of the itemLabel

Not editable fieldRead Only

Should be used only with per-son data

Person name dropdown listName

Should be used only with per-son data

Not editable fieldContact

180

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 181: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Switching data13.10.2.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license with the Operation Planningsublicense is required for switching planning.

To edit switching data items:1. Click Settings in the Sequence Management dialog box, or Advanced in the

Switching planning tab in the General Settings dialog box to open the SwitchingPlan Settings dialog.

2. Select the Switchings tab in the Switching Plan Settings dialog box.3. Select the code of the item from the Code dropdown list, or click New and give a

code for a new item.4. Edit the Label and Word document codes of the item. Label is used in switching

data list to describe item (to enable language support, use language strings from thelanguage database, for more information about language support, see Appendix 8,Localization of DMS 600, in System Administration). TheWord Document code isused in document generation (for more information about documents, see13.9.1, Managing Word documents).

5. To delete a data item select the code of the item from dropdown list, and click Delete.(Default items cannot be deleted.)

To edit the appearance and functionality of the switching data list:1. Click Settings in the Sequence Management dialog box, or Advanced in the

Switching planning tab in the General Settings dialog box to open the SwitchingPlan Settings dialog.

2. Select the Switchings order tab in the Switching Plan Settings dialog box.3. Select a row from the switchings data list to be edited, or select a location from the

switchings data list for a new item (a new item will be added above the selecteditem), and click New to add a new row.

4. Select the code of the data item from the topmost drop down list (each row in thebase data list is divided into two fields, and the data content of each field can beselected independently)

5. Select functionality for each field from the undermost drop down list (for moreinformation about functionality of data items, see 13.10.1, Plan data).

6. To move a row upwards or downwards in the list, select it and click Move up orMove down button.

7. To delete a row, select it from the base data list and click Delete.

Table 13.10.2-1 Default Switching action dataNoteFunction:Data Item:

Do not allow the editing of thisConsecutive number of theswitching action

Number

Code of the switch device orthe starting node of the section

Code

181

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 182: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

NoteFunction:Data Item:

Name of the switch device orthe ending node of the section

Name

Automatically set when readingplanfile (if left empty)

Type of the switch device (dis-connector, cirquit breaker, orsection)

Type

Action to be performedAction

Automatically set when actionis performed in the Executionmode

Performing time of the actionTime

Free text based commentComment

Person who is responsible forperforming action

Responsible

Workgroup which is respons-ible for performing action

Workgroup

Automatically set when readingplanfile (if left empty)

Control type of switch device(Remote or Manual)

Control

Automatically set when readingplanfile (if left empty)

Location of switch device (Sta-tion name, etc.)

Site

Contingency Analysis Data13.11.

This chapter does not apply to DMS 600 (Base) license. Net-work Analysis license with Operation Planning sublicense isrequired for switching planning.

To edit the Contingency Analysis data items:1. Click Settings in the Sequence Management dialog box or Advanced in the

Switching planning tab in the General Settings dialog box. The Switching PlanSettings dialog opens.

2. Select the Contingency Analysis tab in the Switching Plan Settings dialog box.3. Select the code of the item from the Code dropdown list.4. Edit the Label and Word document code of the item.

• The Label is used in the base data list to describe the item (to enable languagesupport, use language strings from language database, for more informationabout language support, see Appendix 8 Localization of DMS 600 in SystemAdministration manual ).

• The Word Document code is used in document generation (for more informationabout documents, see 13.9.1, Managing Word documents).

5. Define the Analyze Contingency command code. In addition, you must add thesame user defined code in the Additional Operations tab. To do this, click Newand select Additional Operation from the Type list. Write the self-defined Analyze

182

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 183: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Contingency command code into the Operation edit box (see 13.12, Modifyingswitching operations). Now you can insert the Analyze Contingency commands intothe contingency analysis plan sequence.

6. Check the Exclude Topology violation alarms check box, if you want to receiveonly the violation alarms produced by the network calculation.

To delete a data item, select the code of the item from the Code dropdown list, and clickDelete. Default items cannot be deleted.

Table 13.11-1 Default Contingency Analysis dataNoteFunctionData item

Automatically filled during thecontingency analysis, which willbe executed always after the'Analyze Congingenzy' com-mand appears in the contin-gency analysis plan sequence.

Network component ID, i.e. theobject of the 'Operation'.

Device

Automatically filled during thecontingency analysis

Constraint violation alarm text(from topology or calculation)or switching operation descrip-tion (from the contingencyanalysis plan sequence)

Operation

Automatically filled'Normal region' of the deviceRegion

Modifying switching operations13.12.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license with the Operation Planningsublicense is required for switching planning.

To edit switching operations:1. Click Settings in the Sequence Management dialog box, or Advanced in the

Switching planning tab in the General Settings dialog box to open the SwitchingPlan Settings dialog.

2. Select the Additional Operations tab in the Switching Plan Settings dialog box.3. Select the type of operation from the Type dropdown list. Types are Section, Switch,

and Additional Operation.4. Select an operation from the Operation dropdown list and edit the operation in the

Operation text box, or click New and type a new operation in the Operation textbox (to enable language support, use language strings from the language database.For more information about language support, see Appendix 8, Localization of DMS600, in System Administration). To add the Analyze Contingency command that

183

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 184: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

is used in creating the Contingency Analysis plan sequence, see previous13.11, Contingency Analysis Data.

5. To delete an operation select it from Operation dropdown list and click Deletebutton.

To edit constant operations:1. Click Settings in the Sequence Management dialog box, or Advanced in the

Switching planning tab in the General Settings dialog box to open the SwitchingPlan Settings dialog.

2. Select the Constant Operations tab in the Switching Plan Settings dialog box.3. Select the operation from the list, and click New to add a new operation if needed

(a new operation will be added to above selected operation).4. Select a device type from the topmost dropdown list. Operation types are Additional

Operation, All Switches (all switch devices bordering the interruption area), andOpen Switches (switch devices bordering the interruption area, and having Openas initial switching state). Also switch devices could be selected based on theircontrol (Remote or Manual).

5. Select operation to be added to the plan from the undermost dropdown list.6. Type additional information to the Comment text box if needed.7. To move an operation upwards or downwards in the list, select it and click Move

up or Move down.8. To delete an operation select it from the list and click Delete.

Reconfiguration planning13.13.

General about reconfiguration13.13.1.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license with the Reconfiguration sub-license is required for reconfiguration

The reconfiguration function helps to find an optimal switching state with minimal lossesin the existing load situation for radial operated networks. The function searches pairsfor open switches to close and for closed switches to open, in order to achieve maximumreduction of losses. The real switching actions are made by the operator.

184

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 185: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Performing reconfiguration planning13.13.2.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license with the Reconfiguration sub-license is required for reconfiguration.

To perform reconfiguration planning:1. Select Operations > Reconfiguration. The Reconfiguration Settings dialog opens.2. Choose whether all switches or only the remotely controlled switches will be included

in the optimization.3. Select Single trial or Double trial algorithm for optimization. The single trial method

is faster, but the double trial may provide better results.4. Define the switches that are currently fixed to be open and that are not changed

during the reconfiguration. Click Insert and then click the switch in the networkwindow to insert the new switch into the list. Click Remove to remove the selectedswitch from the list. Click Load to restore a previously saved list. Click Save tosave the frozen points list in a file.

5. Check the Highlight check box to show the frozen open points with the definedsymbol in the network window (for more information about symbol definition, seeSystem Administration).The selected switch in the list is marked with an inversecolor circle.

6. Click OK to start the optimization process. DMS 600 WS switches to Optimizationmode. A window with a curve showing the progress (losses in kW) opens. ClickStop if you want to interrupt the process while optimization is still running. Thereconfiguration planning results are shown in the Reconfiguration dialog.

7. Select Close or Operations > End optimization to return to State Monitoring Mode.

Reconfiguration planning results13.13.3.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Network Analysis license with the Reconfiguration sub-license is required for reconfiguration.

The Reconfiguration dialog box lists the close/open switch operations that have beendetected to reduce losses. In addition, the initial and final loads and losses with thenumber of proposed changes are shown in the dialog.

Click the radio button in the Current view box to show the switching state before andafter the reconfiguration.

Check the Highlight check box to present the corresponding part of the network coloredwith the warning color in the network window. In addition, the selected changes in thelist are marked with the alarm color.

185

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 186: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Click Save to save the results into a file and to print the results out.

Uncheck any of the changes and click Recalculate to see the effect of the changes intothe results.

186

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 187: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Outage data management14.

General about outage data management14.1.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Outage Reporting and the Statistics licenses are requiredfor outage data management.

The outage data management requires the Outage Reporting and Statistics license. TheFault Location, Low Voltage Networks and Operations Planning licenses are needed forthe full operation of the function.

The main functions in outage data management are:• LV network outage reporting• MV fault reporting• MV maintenance outage reporting• Reclosing reporting• Retrieval of customer and MV/LV station specific outage data• Archiving of outage reports

General about outage data14.2.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Fault Location license is required for outage information.

The duration of a fault as well as the number of unsupplied customers for each outageis available for users without the need to use the Fault Management dialog, or openingthe switching plan. Information about the active faults and maintenance outages iscombined with the network topology.

Viewing outage information14.3.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Outage Reporting and the Statistics licenses are requiredfor outage data management.

To view outage information:

187

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 188: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

1. In the DMS 600 WS, select Window > Outage Information.All unsupplied LV networks are included in the list.You can move the outage information window to any location on the screen or dockit to the application frame.

2. Select the row and open the list.3. View the details of the fault by holding the mouse on top of the fault.

The following details are shown for each fault:• Fault number• Fault Status• Estimated Repairing time• Unsupplied customers• Unsupplied LV NetworksFor each active maintenance outage, the following are shown:• Outage name• Responsible• Estimated ending time• Unsupplied customer count• Unsupplied LV networksUnsupplied customers that are not related to any active outage are shown underOther unsupplied.

4. Right-click the fault and select Locate.The Fault Management dialog opens. See 12.7, Manual MV fault management forinformation on the functions of the dialog.

5. Locate the LV network in the network window by right-clicking the LV network inthe Outage Information list, and by selecting Locate.The application zooms at the unsupplied LV network in the network window.

Reporting fault and maintenance outages14.4.

General about reporting fault and maintenance outages14.4.1.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Outage Reporting and Statistics license is required foroutage data management.

Outage reporting is used for the reporting of basic outage data and actions during a faultclearance and maintenance outage.

When a fault report is opened for the first time and if Save switchings to fault file isnot selected, a dialog box for confirming fault starting and ending times is shown.Switching data is read from the switching log, and stored to the fault file. For moreinformation, see 12.1, General about fault management.

188

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 189: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

DMS 600 WS generates an outage report template. Most of the template's fields are filledin advance on the basis of the executed sequence. You can define the exact MV faultlocation by pointing the location in the network window before reporting. The systemcalculates key values of the MV outage on the basis of outage data (for more informationabout reporting settings, see 7.8.4, Reporting settings). The operator completes the reportand saves the data into archives for later use.

The fault reporting function is used after the fault has been repaired, the supply is restoredand the fault is set to repair. The maintenance outage reporting function is used after theoutage has been repaired and supply is restored.

Fault and maintenance outage reports can also be created by defining an interruptionarea. In this case outage data is not needed.

Outage reporting is performed in the control center. Other workstations can only scanthe outage report data. Only a user who has rights to perform the fault management andis responsible for the appropriate fault or maintenance outage can update the fault reportdata of the outage.

Reporting of LV network outages14.4.2.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Outage Reporting and Statistics license is required foroutage data management.

The customer normally notifies about a low voltage network fault. Information about afault can be saved to DMS 600 WS during the fault. LV outage maintenance data canalso be saved using LV network outage management in the same way as in fault cases.For more information about LV outage data management see 12.11, Management of LVoutage. Data about saved LV outages can be used to create a LV network outage reportwhich can be archived in an archive.

To create a LV outage report:1. Select Fault > LV Network Outage Report to open a list of all saved LV network

outage data.2. Select the desired outage and click OK to open the outage data. The Outage dialog

opens.

189

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 190: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Reporting of MV network outages14.4.3.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Outage Reporting and Statistics license is required foroutage data management.

To report the medium voltage network outages:1. Select Fault > All to open a list containing all fault data. To start MV network outage

reporting, click the fault and then click Fault Report in the Fault Managementdialog.

2. Select Operations > Switching Plan Management to open the Switching PlanManagement dialog. To open an executed plan in the Sequence Managementdialog, click Open plan. To start outage reporting, click Report in the SequenceManagement dialog.

Manual creation of MV outage report14.4.4.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Outage Reporting and Statistics license is required foroutage data management.

To save information about the outage to DMS 600 WS:1. Click Fault > New MV Network Outage Report to open the New MV Network

Outage Report dialog. The dialog contains the following fields:

Table 14.4.4-1 Information in the New MV Network Outage Report dialogNoteInformation:Field:

Automatically filled-in data.Default is the current date andtime.

Starting date and time of theoutage.

Start

Automatically filled-in data.Default is the current date andtime.

Ending time of outage.End

Fault type reports are generallyhandled with reporting func-tions, such as Fault outagereports generated on the basisof fault location data, andMaintenance outage reportsgenerated on the basis ofswitching plan data.

Defines if the outage is a faultor a maintenance outage.

Type

190

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 191: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

NoteInformation:Field:

Select a switching componentby clicking it in the networkwindow.

Right-click a section and selectChange Line State from thepopup menu.

Give the Feeding point of anoutage area either by clickingPoint out or typing the point'scode manually.

Feeding Point

Points are separated from eachother with the delimiter #.

Give other limiting points, ifneeded.

Borders of outage area

2. Click Show area to study the outage area. DMS 600 WS uses current switchingstate to determine the outage area, if the feeding point is given. If other points aregiven, only they are used.

3. Click OK. The Report Management dialog opens.

Reporting reclosings14.4.5.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Outage Reporting and Statistics license is required foroutage data management.

DMS 600 SA saves reclosing data automatically (for more information about reclosingreporting, see System Administration).

To report about a reclosing:1. Select Fault > Reclosing Reports to open a list containing all reclosing data.2. Start reclosing reporting by clicking a reclosing and then click OK.

To insert data for reclosing reports manually:1. Select Fault > New Reclosing Report.2. Insert the reclosed feeder and the type of reclosing (delayed reclosing) and then

click Update.

Automatically filled-in data in reports14.4.6.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Outage Reporting and Statistics license is required foroutage data management.

DMS 600 WS generates a report management dialog in which the following data is filledautomatically or calculated using the outage data:

191

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 192: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Table 14.4.6-1 Automatically filled-in data in the Report Management dialogNoteInformation:Field:

Alternatives:

Fault Report (20 kV)

Maintenance Outage Report(20 kV)

LV Network Outage Report(Fault or Maintenance Outage)

Reclosing Report (Reclosing orDelayed Reclosing)

Defines the type of the report.Report Type

The own running number foreach report type.

Report Number

Change manually, if needed.Defines the starting date andthe time of the outage.

Starting time

Change manually, if needed.Defines the ending date andthe time of the outage.

Ending time

Automatically calculated usingthe starting and ending times.

Duration time for the outage.Duration

The value is a summary of cor-responding values for outageareas.

Number of disturbed LV net-works.

Ds (pcs)

The value is a summary of cor-responding values for outageareas.

Sum of duration of disturb-ances.

Ds (h)

The value is a summary of cor-responding values for outageareas.

Total number of disturbed cus-tomers.

Cust (pcs)

The value is a summary of cor-responding values for outageareas.

Total duration of disturbances.Cust (h)

The value is a summary of cor-responding values for outageareas.

Not delivered energy.NDE (kWh)

Defining exact MV fault location for reporting14.4.7.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Outage Reporting and Statistics license is required foroutage data management.

192

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 193: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

To define the exact MV fault location for the fault outage reporting:1. Click Fault Location in the Report Management dialog or in the Fault Manage-

ment dialog (available only if the fault is not marked repaired with Fault Location).The Exact Fault Location dialog opens.

2. Click Node or Section to define the exact location of the fault.3. Select the type of faulted network component. Select the subtype of the faulted

network component, if there are defined subtypes for the selected network component(for more information about the definition of network components and subcompon-ents, see System Administration).

4. Click Point Out.5. To point the exact fault location, click the main network window. If you select a

node, the nearest node to the given point in the fault area is selected. If you selecta section, the nearest point in any section in the fault area is selected. The nodedialog of the given point is also shown.

6. Click Additional data to insert additional data for the faulted network component.7. Select the fault distance calculation method to be based on fault current or impedance.8. Click Update to update the additional data of the selected network component and

to calculate the distance from the defined fault location to the nearest calculatedfault location. The distance calculation assumes that the fault location has succeededduring the fault location function.

Inserting additional data of an outage14.4.8.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Outage Reporting and Statistics license is required foroutage data management.

Click Additional Data to view and edit the additional data of an outage in the OutageReport dialog. To open the free data form of the outage, check the Use free data formcheck box before clicking Additional Data (for more information about defining thefree data form fields, see System Administration).

The dialog contains the following predefined fields (some fields might be disableddepending on the report type):

Table 14.4.8-1 Predefined fields in reportsNoteInformation:Field:

In all reports.Own running number for eachreport type.

Report

In all reports.Date and time for the outagereport.

Date/Time

In all reports.Writer of the report.Operator

193

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 194: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

NoteInformation:Field:

In all reports.Utility in which the outage hasappeared.

Utility

In all reports. The drop downlist of defined regions.

Region or district in which theoutage has appeared.

Region

In fault reports, maintenanceoutage reports and reclosingreports.

Feeding primary substation.Primary substation

In fault reports, maintenanceoutage reports and reclosingreports.

Feeder in which the outage hasappeared.

Feeder

In all reports. The drop downlist of defined outage reasons.

Reason for the outage.Outage reason

In fault reports, reclosingreports and LV outage reports.The drop down list of definedfault reasons.

Reason for the fault.Fault reason

In fault reports, reclosingreports and LV outage reports.The drop down list of definedfault locations.

Network component in whichthe reason of the fault locates.

Location of fault

In all reports.Free information about theaddress of the outage location.

Address

In all reports.Free information about the out-age.

Additional

In fault reports.Defines if the isolating switch-ings has been performed auto-matically or manually.

Isolating Switching

In fault reports.Defines if the operation duringthe fault has been normal orabnormal (for example, main-tenance outage arrangements).

Operation

In fault reports and reclosingreports.

Contains fault type (earth-fault,short-circuit, cross-country faultor other) and for short-circuitfaults also fault current andnumber of the phases in short-circuit.

Type of fault

In fault reports.Time used for gathering thefield crew.

Searching time (men)

In fault reports.Time used for searching theexact fault location.

Searching time (work)

In fault reports.Time used for repairing thefault.

Repairing time

In fault reports.Working hours used for faultclearance.

Working time

194

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 195: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

NoteInformation:Field:

In fault reports.Weather temperature duringthe fault.

Temperature

In fault reports. The drop downlist of defined wind conditions.

Verbal information about windconditions during the fault.

Wind

In fault reports. The drop downlist of defined humidity condi-tions.

Verbal information abouthumidity conditions during thefault.

Humidity

Outage areas14.4.9.

Viewing outage area data14.4.9.1.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Outage Reporting and Statistics license is required foroutage data management.

Click Outage areas in the Report Management dialog to display the outage data foreach outage area that is created automatically during the calculation of the outage. Eachoutage area has the following data:

Table 14.4.9.1-1 Data of each outage areaButton:

Defines the switches which limit the outage area.Outage areas (borders)

Defines the starting date and time of the outage in the outagearea.

Starting time

Defines the ending date and time of the outage in the outagearea.

Ending time

Duration of the outage in the outage area.Duration

Number of disturbed LV networks in the outage area.Ds (pcs)

Sum of the duration of disturbances in the outage area.Ds (h)

Number of disturbed customers in the outage area.Cust (pcs)

Sum of duration of disturbances in the outage area.Cust (h)

Not delivered energy in the outage area.NDE (kWh)

Defines the number of breaks the outage area has encounteredduring the outage.

Breaks

195

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 196: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Table 14.4.9.1-2 Functions for outage areasNoteFunction:Button:

Highlights the selected outagearea in the main network win-dow.

Show Area

The function is disabled in LVnetwork outage reports andreclosing reports. See14.4.9.2, Manual updating ofswitchings.

Opens the dialog for studyingand editing the stored switch-ings of the outage.

Switchings

The function is disabled in LVnetwork outage reports.

The key values are updatedalso into the Report Manage-ment dialog.

Calculates the key values ofoutage using stored switchings.

Calculate

When you click Calculate,manual changes to the outagearea are deleted.

See 14.4.9.3, Manual updatingof outage areas.

Opens the dialog for manualediting of the selected outagearea.

Change

See 14.4.9.3, Manual updatingof outage areas.

Removes the selected outagearea.

Delete

See 14.4.9.3, Manual updatingof outage areas.

Opens the dialog for adding anew outage area data.

Add

Manual updating of switchings14.4.9.2.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Outage Reporting and Statistics license is required foroutage data management.

To study or edit the automatically stored switching data of the fault clearance andmaintenance outage:1. Click Switchings in the Extent and Severity dialog to open a dialog that contains

the stored switching data. Outage areas are listed so that the first switch is thefeeding switch. Others are switches that border the outage area.

2. If the switching list contains switchings that do not belong to this fault or maintenanceoutage, select the switching and click Remove to remove the selected switchingfrom the list.

3. If some switching data is missing from the switching list, click Add to open a dialogfor adding a new switching item. Click Point Out and then point the switchingcomponent from the network window or insert the component code to the Codefield. Define the switching state.

4. If large number of switching data is missing from the switching list, click ImportSwitchings to open a dialog box for reading switching data from the switching log.

196

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 197: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Adjust the starting and ending time if needed. Check the Remove existing switchingscheckbox if the stored switching data contains a lot of erroneous switchings. ClickOK to import data from the switching log.

5. Click Edit to open a dialog for editing the selected switching data. Edit the data inthe dialog.

6. Click Simulate to simulate the switchings step by step. The network state is shownin the main network window during the simulation.

7. Click OK to save the changes into the fault file. Changes to maintenance outageswitching sequences are not saved.

Manual updating of outage areas14.4.9.3.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Outage Reporting and Statistics license is required foroutage data management.

Update the fault report data primarily by updating the switching data and calculating thenew key values using the changed switching data. Change the automatically stored outagearea data only if the calculation fails or the key values need to be changed.

To change the automatically stored outage area data:1. If the outage area needs to be removed, click Remove after selecting the outage

area.2. Click Change in the Extent and Severity dialog to open a dialog containing the

selected outage area data, or Add to open an empty dialog.3. Click Feeding switch and then point the switching component feeding the selected

outage area from the network window, or insert the code of the component to theCode field.

4. To add bordering switching components in MV network reports, click Borders ofOutage Area and then point the switching components bordering the selected outagearea or insert the code of the components separated by character # to the Code field.

5. To add disturbed customers during an LV network outage reporting, click Customersand point the customer or insert the code of the customers separated by character #to the Code field. You can add customers from any LV network.

6. Click Show Area to highlight the outage area in the network window.7. Click Calculate to calculate the key values of the outage area using the changed

outage data.

When you click Calculate in the Extent and severity dialog,manual changes to outage areas are deleted.

197

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 198: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Printing outage report14.5.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Outage Reporting and Statistics license is required foroutage data management.

To open the preview window of an outage report for saving and printing, click Print inthe Report Management dialog box.

• Select File > Print Setup to set the printer settings.• Select File > Print Preview to open the standard preview window. In this window

you can view the report before sending it to a printer.• Select File > Print to send the report to the defined printer.• Select File > Close to close the preview window and to return to the network view

in DMS 600 WS.

To save the outage report, select File > Save as Text File. The created file can be openedin any text editor.

Archiving outage data14.6.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Outage Reporting and Statistics license is required foroutage data management.

Repaired faults must be transferred to the fault archive so that all new faults can behandled with the fault location function without unnecessary delays.

The outage data of a repaired fault, performed maintenance outage and reclosings canbe archived for continued consideration, for example, for reporting and collecting thecustomer and MV/LV substation outage data (for more information about outage data,see 14.7, Customer and MV/LV substation outage data). This function transfers theoutage data of an active fault, maintenance outage or reclosing to the archive, removesthe outage from the list and the plan from the switching plan management. Click Removeto remove the selected outage from the list and the hard disk without archiving.

To archive a fault, maintenance outage or reclosing:1. Select the active repaired fault, performed maintenance outage or reclosing:

For faults, click Fault > All to open a list of all faults, with the last fault at thetop. Select a fault.

198

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 199: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Archiving is recommended for the oldest repaired faultsif there are over 40 faults in the list. Click Ok to all toaccept the default archive name (the present year) for allarchived faults.

• For maintenance outages, select Operations > Switching Plan Managementto open the dialog box used for the management of all switching plans. Selecta reported outage.

• In the case of the LV network outage, click Fault > LV Network OutageReports to open a list of all saved LV outages. Select an outage.

• For reclosings, click Fault > Reclosing Reports command to open a list of allsaved reclosings. Select a reclosing.

2. Click Archive to transfer the active repaired fault, reported outage or reclosing tothe archive.

3. Give a name for the archive. The default archive name is the year of the startingtime of the outage. You can select other archive names from the popup menu ortype a name into edit box. The name of archive can contain letters and numbers. Ifthe selected archive is not found in the OUTAGE directory, a new archive with thatname is created and the data of the outage saved in this archive. The running numberof the outages in all archives starts from one. If another user uses the archive at thesame time, the archive is locked and information about that is shown to the user.

If the archiving of an outage is not successful, the archive remains locked (for example,in the case of disconnection from the fileserver) and a dialog box opens. The dialog boxenables a new attempt. If the new attempt is not successful, Release is displayed in thedialog box.

Do not release the archive locking if archiving process isincomplete in some other workstation.

Customer and MV/LV substation outage data14.7.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Outage Reporting and Statistics license is required foroutage data management.

With outage queries you can view outage data in the scope of a single customer or aMV/LV substation.

To view customer or MV/LV substation outage data:1. Start the outage query:

199

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 200: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

• For a defined LV network, select Interruptions from the shortcut menu openedby clicking the MV/LV transformer in the network window or network diagram.

• For a defined customer, select Interruptions from the shortcut opened byclicking the customer node in the network window, or by selecting Interruptionsin the Customer search dialog after selecting the customer.

• Without any prior criteria by selecting Fault > Outage Queries.2. Define the search criteria against the report type by checking one or more of the

following check boxes: Fault, LV Fault, Maintenance, LV Maintenance,Reclosing and Delayed Reclosing.

3. Define the search criteria against the included archives (unarchived reports arealways included) by checking one or more from the archive check boxes.

4. Define the search criteria against the starting and ending time and the duration ofthe outage by selecting the operator and inserting the time into the text field.

5. Click Execute to execute the query. Outage query search results contain outage keyvalues and the type of the outages.

6. Click Save to save the report type and included archives to the default criteria.

Exporting outage data14.8.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Outage Reporting and Statistics license and the AdvancedReporting Management sublicense are required for exportingoutage data.

DMS 600 WS enables the exporting of defined outage data to a file. This outage datafile can then be imported, for example, to a customer's information system.

Exported outage data is collected from reported outages in DMS 600 database using thequery function. The query is formed using the outage type, starting and ending dates andoutage duration. The export file contains outage areas and data about them. Every outagearea is saved to the export file only once.

To export outage data into the export file:1. Select Fault > Outage data export. The New outages to be exported to a transfer

file dialog opens.2. Select report type or types.3. Define limits for starting and ending dates. Insert date in the form dd.mm.yy (for

example, 01.01.04).4. Define the limits for the duration of the outage. Insert the duration times in the form

hh:mm:ss (for example, 01:00:00).5. Select the archives that are included in the query.6. Click Execute. Outage areas that meet the query limits and are not yet exported to

the file, will be shown on the dialog.7. Click Export to file.

200

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 201: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

If Export to file is dimmed, verify that all shown outages arereported and the starting and ending dates are saved correctly.

201

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 202: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Database analysis15.

General about database analysis15.1.

The database analysis produces summaries and data collections from the network database.

The analysis is based on queries. DMS 600 software contains a default group of queries.An experienced user can create queries of his/her own using the capabilities of the fullversion of MS Access (for more information about creating queries, see SystemAdministration). Simple queries can also be created using the graphical query creationfeature in DMS 600.

A query can cover the entire network data or a selected object group. The query filterscan contain one or more constraints (for example, manufacturing year before 1970 andthe last maintenance made before year 1995) which are then used to filter the data fromthe database.

The results of queries can be viewed in table format in MS Access. The queries containingcoordinate or node code data can be viewed in graphical form in DMS 600.

Any saved queries can be added to DMS 600 menu commands. Reports from the networkdatabase can also be run using DMS 600 WS menu commands.

A full or runtime version of MS Access is needed, dependingon the covered tasks.

Queries in DMS 600 software15.2.

Query results in DMS 600 software15.2.1.

Graphical queries saved in MS Access can be executed in DMS 600. Simple graphicalqueries can also be created using the functions of DMS 600.

Only graphical queries are shown in DMS 600.

Any saved MS Access queries can be added to the DMS 600 software menu View >Access Queries as a command (for more information about adding queries to menu, see15.4, Adding query command to menu ). Select View > Access Queries > "QueryName" to open MS Access and show the query results in table format (for moreinformation about functions in MS Access, see System Administration).

202

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 203: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Performing ready graphical query15.2.2.

To perform a graphical query:1. Select View > Database Queries > Select Query to Execute to open a dialog box

for selecting a query. The list contains all graphical queries of the database (queriescontaining coordinate fields X and Y or node code field NODE CODE). If the querycan be restricted graphically, focus the query by selecting the objects before perform-ing the query (for more information about using graphical restriction on the query,see 15.2.3, Graphical restriction of the query focus ).

2. Select the desired query.3. Insert the query parameters if needed.

Results of the query are displayed graphically in the main network window and numer-ically in the information window.(For more information about symbols, see SystemAdministration).

Select View > Database Queries > Query Info to open an information window thatshows the name of the query and the object results.

Select View > Database Queries > Clear Results in Network Window to remove theresults from the screen.

Graphical restriction of the query focus15.2.3.

If the graphical restriction has been taken into account during the query design IfSELECTED_NODES table is included to the query, it is possible to restrict a query tothe graphically selected nodes.

Before performing the query, restrict the query focus graphically in the following way:1. Select View > Database Queries > Select Nodes in Network Window to start the

restriction of the query.2. Select the object type for restriction using the list (contains also the free database

objects) or check the All node types check box to select all regular node types tobe included in the query (not the free database objects).

3. Define the area of the restricted query by clicking one corner of the area, draggingthe cursor and releasing it on the opposite corner. The number of selected nodes andthe nodes' codes and names are shown in the Selected Nodes dialog box

4. Click Remove to remove the selected node from the list. Use Browse to open a freedata form of the first selected node.

5. Click OK to save the contents of the dialog box into the table SELECTED_NODEStable in the database.

203

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 204: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Creating simple graphical query in DMS 600 software15.2.4.

This chapter does not apply to the DMS 600 (Base) license.The Extended Data Management license is required for creat-ing queries.

You can create simple graphical queries and present the results of several graphicalqueries simultaneously with the DMS 600 functions.

You need the full version of MS Access to create graphicalqueries in DMS 600.

To create a query:1. Select View > Graphical Database Queries to open the dialog box for query

definitions. The dialog box contains five separate query fields. Each field containsthe definition of one query.

2. Select the base for each query from the list that contains all graphical tables andqueries of the database (tables and queries containing the coordinate fields X andY or the node code field NODE CODE).

3. Define query constraints for each query. Each query can have two constraints. Selectthe field for a constraint from the list that contains all the fields of the selected tableor query. Insert an individual value or a normal SQL operator (<,<=,>,>=,<>,*)together with the value for the selected field. The acceptable values for a field canbe figured out by opening the table or query in MS Access. If both edit boxes areleft empty, all records of the table or query are included in the results. If only oneconstraint is needed, the edit box of the other part is left empty.

4. Define the combination of the two query constraints by selecting and or an operatoroption.

5. Select the Execute check box to take the query into account during the execution.6. Define a symbol for the results of each query. Click Color to open the standard

color definition dialog box. Define the size of the symbol by selecting it from a list.7. Perform the selected queries by clicking Execute. The results are shown in the main

network window. The network window can be zoomed and panned normally.

The number of resulting objects in the network database and in the existing networkwindow is shown in the dialog. The data is refreshed after every change in the zoomingof network window.

To clear the values of all fields and remove the query results from the network window,click Empty All.

To save the queries and definitions of the dialog box into a file, click Save and definethe file in the standard file-saving dialog box.

204

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 205: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

To open the standard file-opening dialog box and to show the queries and definitions ofthe file, click Open.

Reporting15.3.

When reporting network database content with DMS 600, software menu commands arebased on predefined MS Access reports and forms. For more information about definitionof the reports and forms, see System Administration.

To perform the defined report or form:1. Select View > Access Reports and Forms.2. Check Reports or Forms.3. Select the desired reports or forms from the list.4. Click Execute.

Adding query command to menu15.4.

You can add any saved query to the DMS 600 software menu View > Access Queriesas a command. The menu can contain ten query commands at a time. It is very simpleto perform queries with the help of query commands in the menu.

To add a query command to the menu:1. Select View > Access Queries > Add. The command changes to View > Access

Queries > Add New/Remove after you have defined the first query command.2. Select a query to be added from the list and click Add.3. Insert the name for the menu command. The maximum number of characters for

the query command is 32. The query command is shown in the Queries currentlyin menu box.

To remove a query command, select the query and click Delete.

205

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 206: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Appendix 1

Quick guide

Table A1-1 lists the buttons availabe in DMS 600 Network Editor's toolbar.

Table A1-1 Toolbar buttonsDescription:CommandButton

Enables the definition of general settings byopening a dialog box.

Settings > General

Opens an alarm window and displays the mostrecent alarms.

Window > Notices andEvents

Enables the definition of map printing settings,the previewing of maps and printing.

File > Print Preview/MapPrinting

Refreshes network topology in network win-dows.

Analyze > Refresh Topology

Performs a network and protection analysis.The dialog box for selecting one or all substa-tions opens.

Analyze > Network & Protec-tion

Disables some functionality to enhance theperformance of DMS 600 WS in extreme condi-tions.

Analyze > Disturbance Mode

Opens a dialog box for selecting the station thatopens to a station diagram window.

View > Station Diagram

Enables the definition of background map out-look by opening a dialog box.

Settings > Maps > Outlook

Defines the displaying of MV/LV station codesin the main network window.

View > Show > MV/LV Sta-tion Labels=>Codes

Defines the displaying of MV/LV station labelsin the main network window.

View > Show > MV/LV Sta-tion Labels=>Labels

Defines the displaying of switch codes in themain network window.

View > Show > SwitchLabels > Codes

Defines the showing of switch labels in the mainnetwork window.

View > Show > SwitchLabels > Labels

Defines the displaying of remote disconnectorswith white symbols in the main network window.

View > Show > RemoteDisconnectors

Enables the saving, restoring and deleting ofzoom views that use a separate dialog.

View > Save/Restore Zoom

Returns the main network window to the previ-ous zoom. The command can also be given withthe Previous Zoom shortcut menu.

View > Zoom Previous

Displays the whole network in the main networkwindow.

View > Zoom All

206

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 207: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Description:CommandButton

Zooms in on the main network window step bystep.

View > Zoom In

Zooms out on the main network window stepby step

View > Zoom Out

Customer search by name.No menu command

Use Fixed Colors defined for MV-Feed-ers/Primary Transformers. Common for the twocoloring modes Topology by Feeders andTopology by Primary Transformers, and com-mon for the both network windows.

View > Coloring > Use FixedColors

Colors adjacent network feeders with separatecolors in an active network window.

View > Coloring > Topo-logy by Feeders

Colors all the distribution network lines fed bya common transformer with the same color inan active network window.

View > Coloring > Topo-logy by Primary Trans-formers

Colors the distribution medium and low voltagenetwork lines according to voltage drops in anactive network window.

View > Coloring > VoltageDrops

Colors the distribution network according theuser-defined Voltage Levels.

View > Coloring > VoltageLevels

Colors the distribution network lines in MV net-works according to their ability to detect overcur-rent faults and in LV networks according to faultcurrent/fuse value in an active network window.

View > Coloring > DetectionAbility to Overcurrent Fault

View > Coloring > Fault Cur-rent/Fuse )

Colors the distribution network lines in MV net-works according to 3-phase short-circuit capa-city and in LV networks according to the detec-tion of short-circuit protection in an active net-work window.

View > Coloring > 3-phaseShort circuit Capacity

View > Coloring > Short-cir-cuit Protection )

Colors the distribution network according toearth-fault protection in an active network win-dow.

View > Coloring > Earth FaultProtection

Colors the distribution network in MV networksaccording to load levels and in LV networksaccording to the detection of overload protectionin an active network window.

View > Coloring > LoadLevels

View > Coloring > OverloadProtection

Colors the conductor types according to theirresistance and type in the active network win-dow.

View > Coloring > Line Types

Starts the help program and displays theappropriate help topic.

Help > Contents and Index

Changes the cursor into a question mark for theselection of the place on the screen for whichthe help is needed.

Help > What's This?

207

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 208: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

208

Page 209: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Index

Aabnormal switching states ................................................................................. 107active fault ........................................................................................................ 161adding menu features ......................................................................................... 93Admin ................................................................................................................ 26alarms ................................................................................................................ 76AMR

fault handling ................................................................................................ 114measurements .............................................................................................. 119meter configuration ....................................................................................... 120meter settings ............................................................................................... 117

AMR user interfaceintegration .................................................................................................... 113

AnalyzeBack to State Monitoring ................................................................................. 66Forecast ....................................................................................................... 136Meshed Network Analysis ............................................................................. 137Meshed Network Short Circuit Currents .......................................................... 133Network & Protection .................................................................................... 128Refresh Topology .................................................................................... 45, 138Set Calculation Time ..................................................................................... 142Simulation .................................................................................................... 137Starting Motors ............................................................................................. 127

archives ............................................................................................................. 74attached documents ............................................................................................ 74attachments ....................................................................................................... 74automatic functions

load forecasting ............................................................................................ 124work-station-specific ....................................................................................... 45

Bbackground colors .............................................................................................. 31background map ................................................................................................. 63background maps ......................................................................................... 31, 63border switches .................................................................................................. 89brightness .......................................................................................................... 49browsing ............................................................................................................ 74

Ccertainty factor .................................................................................................... 57code contorls ...................................................................................................... 36color bitmaps ...................................................................................................... 49color settings

209

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 210: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

brightness and contrast ................................................................................... 49coloring limits ................................................................................................. 48general .......................................................................................................... 48MV/LV station ................................................................................................. 48

coloringnetwork and protection analysis ....................................................................... 35network diagrams ........................................................................................... 38network windows ............................................................................................ 34station diagrams ............................................................................................. 40

Common User .................................................................................................... 26conductor codes ................................................................................................. 35contingency analysis ................................................................................. 174, 182contrast .............................................................................................................. 49control dialogs .................................................................................................... 39control pictures

window .......................................................................................................... 39customer information .......................................................................................... 83

Ddata

contingency analysis ..................................................................................... 182database analysis ............................................................................................. 202date and time for network analysis ..................................................................... 142disturbance data form .................................................................................. 99, 101document settings ............................................................................................. 177document templates .......................................................................................... 177downstream traces ............................................................................................ 106

Eevent list ....................................................................................................... 80–81events ................................................................................................................ 76events list ........................................................................................................... 79exact MV fault location ...................................................................................... 192

FFault

All ......................................................................................................... 153, 190Archives > Fault Archives > Fault Archives ....................................................... 75LV Network Outage Report ............................................................................ 189Messages ................................................................................................. 47, 86New ...................................................................................................... 166–167New MV Network Outage Report ................................................................... 190New Reclosing Report ................................................................................... 191Outage data export ....................................................................................... 200Outage Queries ............................................................................................ 199Reclosing Reports ................................................................................. 191, 199SMS Message History ..................................................................................... 85

210

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 211: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

SMS messages .............................................................................................. 47SMS Messages .............................................................................................. 84Start Automatic Fault Isolation .................................................................. 66, 144

fault detector .................................................................................................... 147fault detetor data ............................................................................................... 159fault distance .................................................................................................... 146fault filtering ...................................................................................................... 145fault handling area ............................................................................................ 145fault impedance data ......................................................................................... 157fault information ................................................................................................ 165fault isolation

automatic .............................................................................................. 149–150manual ......................................................................................................... 151

fault location .......................................................................................... 56, 59, 145fault location calculation ...................................................................................... 59fault location demonstration ............................................................................... 167fault location parameters ................................................................................... 166fault location simulation ..................................................................................... 164fault management ............................................................................................. 143fault reporting ................................................................................................... 188fault restoration

automatic .............................................................................................. 149–150manual ......................................................................................................... 151

fault zone definition ........................................................................................... 162faulted zone location ........................................................................................... 57Feeder report tool ............................................................................................. 130feeding network data ......................................................................................... 160field crews .......................................................................................................... 92File

Change Line State ........................................................................................ 110Change Switch State ............................................................................. 109–110Close ........................................................................................................... 198Documents > Components .............................................................................. 74Load LV Networks ................................................................................... 68, 107Load network view .......................................................................................... 37Login ............................................................................................................. 28Logoff ....................................................................................................... 26, 29Map Printing Setup ......................................................................................... 95Objects .......................................................................................................... 72Print ............................................................................................................. 198Print Preview ................................................................................................ 198Print Setup ................................................................................................... 198Printer Setup .................................................................................................. 96Refresh Network Data ..................................................................................... 69Relay Data Source > Network Model ............................................... 131–132, 140Relay Data Source > Relay ........................................................................... 131Save as Normal State .............................................................................. 70, 107Save as Text File .......................................................................................... 198Save Switching State .................................................................................... 138Scada Pictures ............................................................................................... 82User Defined Features > Add .......................................................................... 93User Defined Features > Add New/Remove ..................................................... 93

211

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 212: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

file manager ....................................................................................................... 28files

exe ................................................................................................................ 28findings .............................................................................................................. 94fixed color .......................................................................................................... 34fixed diagrams .................................................................................................... 40forecasting ....................................................................................................... 124free data form ..................................................................................................... 71free database object ........................................................................................... 36

Ggraphical queries .............................................................................................. 204graphical query ................................................................................................. 203GSM messages ..................................................................................... 47, 83, 167Guest ................................................................................................................. 26

HHelp

About ............................................................................................................. 41Contents and Index ......................................................................................... 41What's This? .................................................................................................. 41

help window ....................................................................................................... 41historical event simulations .................................................................................. 82historical events .................................................................................................. 81history logs ......................................................................................................... 81

Iimpedance-based earth-fault ............................................................................... 60impedance-based fault location ........................................................................... 59important MV/LV stations ..................................................................................... 75internal station diagrams ..................................................................................... 39

Llabel controls ...................................................................................................... 36line colors ........................................................................................................... 31line section states ............................................................................................. 110load current compensation .................................................................................. 58load curves ....................................................................................................... 125load estimation ................................................................................................. 124load forecasting ................................................................................................ 124load modeling ................................................................................................... 123load points ......................................................................................................... 89log files .............................................................................................................. 81logoff ................................................................................................................. 26LV outage report ............................................................................................... 116LV outages ....................................................................................................... 168

212

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 213: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

LV switch states ................................................................................................ 111

MMain

Login ............................................................................................................. 26manual fault isolation and restoration ................................................................. 163manual outage level updates ............................................................................. 197manual state update ......................................................................................... 109manual swithcing updates ................................................................................. 196map printing ....................................................................................................... 95maps

raster ............................................................................................................. 17measurement ..................................................................................................... 36measurement data ............................................................................................ 125meshed network ................................................................................................. 54meter configuration ........................................................................................... 120MicroSCADA

alarms ............................................................................................................ 76pictures .......................................................................................................... 82

modes ................................................................................................................ 66MV fault location ............................................................................................... 192MV fault management ....................................................................................... 143MV feeder information ......................................................................................... 75

Nnetwork analysis .................................................................................. 49, 122, 125

date and time ............................................................................................... 142starting motors .............................................................................................. 126

network analysis settings ................................................................................... 138network components ........................................................................................... 70network data update ........................................................................................... 69network diagram ................................................................................................. 37network diagrams

codes and labels ............................................................................................ 38coloring .......................................................................................................... 38

network topology .............................................................................................. 105network view ...................................................................................................... 44network view settings .......................................................................................... 43networks

neutral isolated ............................................................................................. 146No view rights ..................................................................................................... 26node information ................................................................................................. 71normal switching state ......................................................................................... 70notes ................................................................................................................. 94notices ............................................................................................................. 132notices list .......................................................................................................... 78

213

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 214: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Oonline help ......................................................................................................... 41operational zooming

session specific zooms ................................................................................... 33system specific zooms .................................................................................... 33

OperationsCreate Sequence .......................................................................................... 171End optimization ........................................................................................... 185Outage Location ........................................................................................... 171Reconfiguration ............................................................................................ 185Start Switching Planning ................................................................................ 171Stop Planning ......................................................................................... 66, 172Switching Plan Management ..................................................... 97, 172, 190, 199

OperaWS.exe ..................................................................................................... 28outage

additional data .............................................................................................. 193outage areas .................................................................................................... 195outage data archiving ........................................................................................ 198outage data exports .......................................................................................... 200outage reporting ............................................................................................... 188outages ............................................................................................................ 168

Ppassword

adding ........................................................................................................... 42changing ........................................................................................................ 43

pictures .............................................................................................................. 82plan data .......................................................................................................... 178primary transformer data ................................................................................... 159protection analysis .......................................................................... 52, 54, 122, 131protection analysis results ................................................................................. 134protection relay ................................................................................................. 132

Qqueries ............................................................................................................. 202query commands .............................................................................................. 205query results ..................................................................................................... 202

Rraster maps ........................................................................................................ 17real fault location ....................................................................................... 165–166reclosings reporting ........................................................................................... 191reconfiguration .................................................................................................. 184reconfiguration planning .................................................................................... 185region

dynamic ......................................................................................................... 27

214

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 215: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

region management ............................................................................................ 26regions

selecting ........................................................................................................ 66relays settings .................................................................................................. 131reporting ..................................................................................................... 61, 205

SSettings

Fault Location ................................................................................................. 56Fonts ............................................................................................................. 44General ....................................................................................... 44–45, 48, 138Languages ..................................................................................................... 43Maps > Location ............................................................................................. 64Maps > Outlook ................................................................................... 31, 49, 63MV Network Color Limits ................................................................................. 49User Manager ................................................................................................ 42

settingsautomatic functions ......................................................................................... 45background map ............................................................................................. 63certainty factor ................................................................................................ 57color .............................................................................................................. 48fault location ............................................................................................. 56, 59faulted zone location ....................................................................................... 57fonts .............................................................................................................. 44general .......................................................................................................... 42general netwoek analysis ................................................................................ 49GSM messages .............................................................................................. 47impedance-based earth-fault ........................................................................... 60language ........................................................................................................ 43load current compensation .............................................................................. 58meshed network ............................................................................................. 54network analysis ............................................................................................. 49network view .................................................................................................. 43protection analysis .......................................................................................... 52reporting ........................................................................................................ 61switching planning .......................................................................................... 60switching state document ................................................................................ 62telephone answering machine ......................................................................... 47user rights ...................................................................................................... 42

simulation ......................................................................................................... 137simulations ......................................................................................................... 82SMS messages ................................................................................................ 167starting ............................................................................................................... 28starting motors .................................................................................................. 126station diagrams ................................................................................................. 39

coloring .......................................................................................................... 40station pictures

window .......................................................................................................... 39substation texts .................................................................................................. 73switch state change events .................................................................................. 81

215

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 216: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

switch state quality ............................................................................................ 104switches

connected to MicroSCADA ............................................................................ 108not connected to MicroSCADA ....................................................................... 109

switching actions ............................................................................................... 111switching data ................................................................................................... 181switching devices along trace ............................................................................ 106switching planning ....................................................................................... 60, 170switching sequence

automatic ..................................................................................................... 171executing ..................................................................................................... 175general ......................................................................................................... 170manual ......................................................................................................... 172modifying ..................................................................................................... 173saving and copying ....................................................................................... 173simulating ..................................................................................................... 174

switching state document ............................................................................... 62, 88switching states ................................................................................................ 108switching_plan_customers.dot

contingency_analysis_sequence_listing.dot .................................................... 176switching_plan_listing.dot ................................................................................. 176switchings ........................................................................................................ 173symbol legend .................................................................................................... 37symbols ............................................................................................................. 31

Ttelephone answering machine ........................................................................ 47, 86templates ......................................................................................................... 177text object .......................................................................................................... 36topology management ....................................................................................... 104traces

Monitor Pro graphics ..................................................................................... 106network diagram ........................................................................................... 106network window ............................................................................................ 106

Trouble Call Management ................................................................................... 99

Uunsupplied customer ......................................................................................... 108unsupplied LV network

viewing ......................................................................................................... 187unsupplied MV/LV station .................................................................................. 108upstream traces ................................................................................................ 106user information .................................................................................................. 42user interface

fonts .............................................................................................................. 44general .......................................................................................................... 30

user interface language ....................................................................................... 43user levels .......................................................................................................... 26user management ............................................................................................... 26

216

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 217: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

user nameadding ........................................................................................................... 42

user rights .................................................................................................... 26, 42

Vvector maps ....................................................................................................... 17Velander's factors ............................................................................................... 51View

Access Queries ..................................................................................... 202, 205Access Queries > Add ................................................................................... 205Access Reports and Forms ........................................................................... 205Coloring > Hide voltages… .............................................................................. 35Coloring > Topology by Feeders .................................................... 34, 38, 40, 105Coloring > Topology by Primary Transformers ................................................. 105Coloring > Use Fixed Colors ...................................................................... 34, 37Coloring > Voltage Drops ................................................................................ 35Create switching state document ..................................................................... 62Customer Information ..................................................................................... 83Database Queries > Clear Results in Network Window .............................. 70, 203Database Queries > Query Info ..................................................................... 203Database Queries > Select Nodes in Network Window .................................... 203Database Queries > Select Query to Execute ................................................. 203Feeder ........................................................................................................... 34Find > Switch/MV/LV Station ...................................................................... 68, 70Findings ......................................................................................................... 95Graphical Database Queries .......................................................................... 204Notes > New .................................................................................................. 94Regions ......................................................................................................... 66Show ............................................................................................................. 44Show > Abnormal Switching States .......................................................... 70, 107Show > Conductor Codes ............................................................................... 35Show > Field Crew ......................................................................................... 93Show > Important MV/LV Stations .................................................................... 75Show > LV Switch Changes ........................................................................... 107Show > MV/LV Substation Texts ...................................................................... 73Show > Show Conductors by Line Types .......................................................... 35Show > Substation Labels ......................................................................... 36, 39Show > Unsupplied MV/LV Stations ................................................................. 35Show >Object Types ....................................................................................... 36Station Diagram .............................................................................................. 39Station diagram ............................................................................................ 109Zoom In ......................................................................................................... 32

viewStation Diagram .............................................................................................. 39

voltage levelscontolling ....................................................................................................... 68hiding ............................................................................................................. 35

217

DMS 600 4.3MicroSCADA Pro1MRS756667

Operation Manual

Page 218: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Wwarnings

notices ........................................................................................................... 76Window

Line Color Legend .......................................................................................... 37Notices and Events ............................................................... 78–79, 82, 105, 129Symbol Legend .............................................................................................. 37Toolbar ........................................................................................................... 30

WindowsArrange Windows ........................................................................................... 30

Word documents ............................................................................................... 176workstation status bar ......................................................................................... 30

Zzoom ................................................................................................................. 32

218

1MRS756667MicroSCADA ProDMS 600 4.3

Operation Manual

Page 219: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena
Page 220: Dms600 Operation Manual 756667 Ena

Contact us

1MR

S75

6667

A/9

.10.

2009

 © C

opyr

ight

200

9 A

BB

. All

right

s re

serv

ed.

ABB OySubstation Automation ProductsP.O. Box 699FI-65101 VAASA, FINLANDTel. +358 10 22 11Fax. +358 10 224 1094

www.abb.com/substationautomation